12.11.2014 Views

Introductory Physics Volume Two

Introductory Physics Volume Two

Introductory Physics Volume Two

SHOW MORE
SHOW LESS

You also want an ePaper? Increase the reach of your titles

YUMPU automatically turns print PDFs into web optimized ePapers that Google loves.

1<br />

<strong>Introductory</strong> <strong>Physics</strong><br />

<strong>Volume</strong> <strong>Two</strong><br />

Saint Mary’s College<br />

Chris Ray<br />

Spring 2012<br />

cover art by Susana del Baño Ranner


2 Electric Field 1.0


1.1 Electric Charge 3<br />

Demo<br />

1 Electric Field<br />

§ 1.1 Electric Charge<br />

Sometimes when you pet a cat, the cat’s fur begins to stand up<br />

on end and if you then touch the cats nose, you and the cat are both<br />

shocked. Through petting, the cat has been charged with static electricity.<br />

The shock occurs when the cat discharges the built up static<br />

charge to your finger. She has not done this on purpose, it is simply<br />

the inevitable force of nature taking its course, so don’t get mad at the<br />

cat. Of course if you had not touched the cat’s nose she would have lost<br />

her charge more gradually through the air, so she might have reason to<br />

be mad at you for sucking all the charge from her nose.<br />

Let’s investigate static electricity further.<br />

Static Electricity: Rub a rubber rod with fur and hang it by a string.<br />

Rub a second rubber rod with fur and bring it near the first:<br />

Rubber Rods rubbed with fur<br />

Observe that the charge rods repel one another. Thus, for two rods<br />

of the same material rubbed in the same way we find there will be<br />

a repulsive force between them. Remove the second rubber rod, and<br />

replace it with a plexiglass rod that has been rubbed with the fur.<br />

Observe that the hanging rubber rod is attracted to the plexiglass rod.<br />

So it is possible by rubbing different objects with fur to cause either<br />

attractive or repulsive forces between the objects.<br />

The observations above can be explained by the existence of two<br />

types of “electric charge.” Objects with the same charge repel each<br />

other, while objects with different charges attract one another. The<br />

two types of charge, following the convention of Benjamin Franklin,<br />

are called positive and negative. Rubbing rubber with fur leaves the<br />

rubber with a negative charge, while rubbing plexiglass with fur leaves<br />

the plexiglass with a positive charge.


4 Electric Field 1.1<br />

Fact: <strong>Two</strong> Types of Charge<br />

From observations, such as the demonstration with the rubber rods<br />

and fur, we have the following rules:<br />

• There are two types of electric charge: + and -.<br />

• Objects with the same sign charge repel.<br />

• Object with oppositely signed charges attract<br />

⊙ Do This Now 1.1<br />

Your friend Albert claims that he has isolated a third type of electric charge<br />

in nature. He calls the three types of charge A, B and C. Explain how he<br />

would prove this to you. Hint: you might think about the rock-paper-scissors<br />

game, and make a table showing which pairs are attractive and which are<br />

repulsive.<br />

Does the fur rubbing against the rubber (plexiglass) create the<br />

negative (positive) electric charge? It turns out that the answer is<br />

no. Careful experiments show that whenever a negative electric charge<br />

shows up an equal amount of positive charge will be found somewhere<br />

else, and vice versa. The net charge in the universe remains zero. To<br />

see this for the rod-fur case, consider the following. Charge a rubber<br />

rod with fur, hang the rod and then bring the fur near the rod. The<br />

negatively charged rod will be attracted to the fur, showing that the<br />

fur has gained a positive charge. We can understand what is going<br />

on by considering the fundamental building blocks of normal matter:<br />

protons, neutrons and electrons. Protons have a positive charge +e,<br />

neutrons have no charge, and electrons have a negative charge −e.<br />

Uncharged objects contains an equal number of electrons and protons.<br />

A net electric charge is usually established on an object by adding<br />

or removing electrons. In the case of the fur and rod, electrons are<br />

removed form the fur and collected by the rod. This leaves the fur<br />

with a net positive charge (more protons than electrons) and the rod<br />

with a net negative charge (more electrons than protons).<br />

⊙ Do This Now 1.2<br />

Explain why the cat’s fur stands on end when it is pet.<br />

Fact: Electric Charge<br />

Electric Charge is neither created nor destroyed.<br />

Demo<br />

Charging Without Rubbing: Hang two small metal balls as indicated<br />

below:


1.1 Electric Charge 5<br />

Then charge a rubber rod with fur, place it in contact with the metal<br />

balls, and then remove it. The two balls will be observed to repel each<br />

other.<br />

Here is how we can explain the demonstration. When the rubber rod<br />

comes in contact with the metal, some of the charge (which is negative<br />

since it is from a rubber rod rubbed with fur) moves over to the metal.<br />

This is because metals easily accept or give up electric charge; electric<br />

charge moves easily through metals. If we indicate the charges using<br />

negative signs, then we can represent what happens with the following<br />

picture:<br />

- - -<br />

-<br />

-<br />

-<br />

- -<br />

- - - -<br />

-<br />

-<br />

-<br />

-<br />

-<br />

- -<br />

-<br />

-<br />

-<br />

-<br />

- -<br />

-<br />

-<br />

-<br />

The charges move from the rubber rod onto the metal balls because<br />

of the repulsive forces between them. Once isolated, the two metal<br />

spheres repel each other because they both have a net charge of the<br />

same sign.<br />

Example<br />

<strong>Two</strong> equal masses, each with mass m = 4g, are electrically charged<br />

and hung using string as shown. If the masses hang in equilibrium at<br />

an angle θ = 10 ◦ , what is the magnitude of the electric force that each<br />

mass exerts on the other?


6 Electric Field 1.1<br />

θ<br />

First draw a free body diagram for one of the masses:<br />

θ<br />

2<br />

F T<br />

F E<br />

mg<br />

Sum forces:<br />

∑ ⃗F = î(FT sin θ 2 − F E) + ĵ(F T cos θ 2 − mg) = 0<br />

This gives two equations:<br />

F E = F T sin θ 2<br />

F T cos θ 2 = mg<br />

Solving for the electric force F E gives<br />

F E = mg tan θ 2 = (.004kg)(9.8 m s<br />

) tan(5 ◦ ) = 3.4mN<br />

2<br />

Demo<br />

Moving Charges: Place an aluminum can on a table. Perviously we<br />

showed that we had two types or charge. If we produce either of these<br />

types of charge the can is attracted toward the charge.<br />

- - -<br />

-<br />

- - -


-<br />

-<br />

-<br />

-<br />

-<br />

1.2 Coulomb’s Law 7<br />

How can we understand this apparently new type of charge, a<br />

charge that is attracted to both positive and negative charges? The<br />

place to start is consider the aluminum of which the can is composed.<br />

Each aluminum atom is composed of an equal number of protons and<br />

electrons, so the net charge of the can is zero. But there is a difference<br />

between the protons and electrons. The aluminum atoms are locked<br />

together in a crystal lattice, with the protons locked together with the<br />

neutrons in the nucleus of the atoms. The protons cannot move. On the<br />

other hand some of the electrons are shared between all of the atoms,<br />

and move around freely. This is what makes aluminum a conductor, it<br />

has electrons that move freely through the bulk of the material.<br />

So when a positively charged rod is brought near the can the electrons<br />

are attracted toward the oppositely charged rod and the move<br />

within the metal a little bit toward the rod. This leaves the can with a<br />

net negative charge on the side toward the rod and a net positive charge<br />

on the side away from the rod. The net positive charge is because the<br />

protons did not move, so that when the electrons moved toward the<br />

other side of the can, the protons were left alone, unpaired.<br />

+<br />

+<br />

-<br />

+<br />

-<br />

+<br />

-<br />

+<br />

-<br />

-<br />

+<br />

-<br />

+<br />

-<br />

+<br />

-<br />

+<br />

-<br />

+<br />

can alone<br />

-<br />

+<br />

-<br />

+<br />

-<br />

+<br />

+<br />

-<br />

+<br />

-<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

-<br />

+<br />

-<br />

-<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

-<br />

+<br />

-<br />

+<br />

-<br />

+<br />

-<br />

+<br />

-<br />

+<br />

-<br />

+<br />

-<br />

+<br />

+<br />

-<br />

+<br />

+<br />

-<br />

+<br />

-<br />

+<br />

-<br />

-<br />

can next to<br />

+ rod<br />

-<br />

-<br />

-<br />

-<br />

-<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

-<br />

+<br />

-<br />

+<br />

-<br />

+<br />

-<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

-<br />

-<br />

+ + + +<br />

-<br />

-<br />

-<br />

-<br />

+<br />

showing<br />

net charge<br />

+ + + +<br />

One might think that the net force would still be zero once the electrons<br />

have redistributed themselves, since we end up with a net positive<br />

charge on one side that is repelled and a net negative charge on the<br />

other side that is attracted. But it ends up that the force between two<br />

charges decreases with distance, so that the repulsive force is less than<br />

the attractive force.<br />

⊙ Do This Now 1.3<br />

Explain how a negatively charged rod also attracts the can.<br />

§ 1.2 Coulomb’s Law<br />

As we have seen there is a force between charged objects. After<br />

careful observation it was determined that the electrical force is


8 Electric Field 1.2<br />

similar to the gravitational force. Recall that the gravitational force<br />

between two massive objects is inversely proportional to the square of<br />

the distance between the objects and proportional to the weight of each<br />

object. The electric force between two charged objects is also inversely<br />

proportional to the square of the distance between the objects and is<br />

proportional to the charge on each object. This observational fact is<br />

referred to as Coulomb’s Law.<br />

Fact: Coulomb’s Law<br />

The magnitude of the force between charges q a and q b that are a<br />

distance r apart is given by<br />

F = q aq b 1<br />

4πɛ o r 2<br />

1<br />

where<br />

4πɛ o<br />

= 8.987552 × 10 9 N · m 2 /C 2 ≈ 9.0 × 10 9 N · m 2 /C 2 .<br />

It has already been noted that the direction of the<br />

electric force is determined by the sign of the charges:<br />

opposites charges attract, like charges repel.<br />

Fact: Coulomb’s Law in Vector Form<br />

The magnitude and direction of the electric force can be combined<br />

into one vector expression of Coulomb’s Law as follows:<br />

⃗F ab = q aq b ⃗r a − ⃗r b<br />

4πɛ 0 |⃗r a − ⃗r b | 3<br />

where F ⃗ ab is the force on charge a due to charge b and ⃗r a and ⃗r b<br />

are the position vectors of the two charges. Note that if we let<br />

⃗r = ⃗r a − ⃗r b that we can write<br />

⃗F ab = q aq b 1<br />

4πɛ 0 r 2 ˆr<br />

The vectors in the above definition are pictured below.<br />

a<br />

r a<br />

r ab<br />

r b<br />

b<br />

Both vectors are from the origin of the coordinate system, which can<br />

be chosen for computational convenience.


1.2 Coulomb’s Law 9<br />

Example<br />

Consider three charges as shown. We want to know the net force on<br />

charge a due to charges b and c.<br />

0.4<br />

y (m)<br />

4.0 mC<br />

r b<br />

2.0 nC<br />

r a<br />

0.2<br />

r c<br />

-3.0 nC<br />

0.0<br />

0.0<br />

We find from the diagram that<br />

0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0<br />

x (m)<br />

⃗r a = (0.2î + 0.4ĵ)m and q a = 4.0 × 10 −3 C<br />

⃗r b = (0.8î + 0.5ĵ)m and q b = 2.0 × 10 −9 C<br />

⃗r c = (0.7î + 0.2ĵ)m and q c = −3.0 × 10 −9 C<br />

so that we can compute<br />

⃗r a − ⃗r b = (−0.6î − 0.1ĵ)m and q a q b = 8.0 × 10 −12 C 2<br />

⃗r a − ⃗r c = (−0.5î + 0.2ĵ)m and q a q c = −12.0 × 10 −12 C 2<br />

so that<br />

⃗F a = F ⃗ ab + F ⃗ ac<br />

= q aq b<br />

4πɛ 0<br />

⃗r a − ⃗r b<br />

|⃗r a − ⃗r b | 3 + q aq c<br />

4πɛ 0<br />

−0.6î − 0.1ĵ<br />

⃗r a − ⃗r c<br />

|⃗r a − ⃗r c | 3<br />

−0.5î + 0.2ĵ<br />

= 0.072N − 0.108N<br />

| − 0.6î − 0.1ĵ|<br />

3<br />

| − 0.5î + 0.2ĵ| 3<br />

−0.6î − 0.1ĵ<br />

−0.5î + 0.2ĵ<br />

= 0.072N − 0.108N<br />

(0.6 2 + 0.1 2 )<br />

3/2<br />

(0.5 2 + 0.2 2 ) 3/2<br />

= 0.32N(−0.6î − 0.1ĵ) − 0.69N(−0.5î + 0.2ĵ)<br />

= (0.15î − 0.17ĵ)N<br />

The net force is to the right and down at about a 45 ◦ .<br />

If we reworked the previous example but with the charge q a doubled,<br />

then we would find that the force on the charge q a would also be<br />

doubled, ⃗ Fa = 2(0.15î − 0.17ĵ)N. In general the force on a charge is<br />

proportional to the charge. For example, in the previous example<br />

⃗F a = q a (37.5 î − 42.5 ĵ) N C .<br />

So we find that the ratio of the force and charge is a constant.<br />

⃗F a<br />

q a<br />

= (37.5 î − 42.5 ĵ) N C .


10 Electric Field 1.2<br />

This observation leads to the definition of the electric field, which occurs<br />

in the next section.<br />

When computing the net electric force it is sometimes easier to<br />

deal with the directions “by hand”. If you can tell the direction of the<br />

force simply by looking at the configuration, then there is no reason to<br />

use the vector form of Coulmb’s law. In such a situation just use the<br />

magnitude form F = qaq b 1<br />

4πɛ o r<br />

. The following example will demonstrate<br />

2<br />

the “by hand” method.<br />

Example<br />

There are three equal charges q at each vertex of an equilateral triangle<br />

with sides of length L. What is the force on each charge?<br />

Let us find the force on the charge at the top. We know that the forces<br />

are repulsive so that we can draw the free body diagram for the charge<br />

on the top.<br />

F 1<br />

F 1<br />

F 2<br />

F net<br />

F 2<br />

By inspection we see that the two forces are both at a 30 ◦ angle from<br />

the vertical, and that the horizontal components of the two forces are<br />

equal and opposite. So that when we add the two forces together, to<br />

get the net force, the horizontal components will cancel. The net force<br />

will be just the sum of the vertical components.<br />

⃗F net = F 1y ĵ + F 2y ĵ = F 1 cos 30 ◦ ĵ + F 2 cos 30 ◦ ĵ<br />

= q2 1<br />

4πɛ 0 L 2 cos 30◦ ĵ +<br />

q2 1<br />

4πɛ 0 L 2 cos 30◦ ĵ<br />

= 2 q2 1<br />

4πɛ 0 L 2 cos 30◦ ĵ<br />

By the symmetry of the configuration the force on the other two charges<br />

will be the same magnitude and also pointing directly away from the<br />

center of the group.<br />

⊲ Problem 1.1<br />

There are two +q charges and two −q charges on the corners of a square<br />

of size a as shown.


1.3 Electric Field 11<br />

+ -<br />

Compute the net force on each charge?<br />

⊲ Problem 1.2<br />

You have three charges as shown.<br />

-<br />

+<br />

a<br />

y (m)<br />

0.2<br />

0.1<br />

0.0<br />

- 0.1<br />

- 0.2<br />

- 0.3<br />

1.0 µC<br />

3.0 µC<br />

0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0<br />

-2.0 µC<br />

x (m)<br />

What is the net force on each charge?<br />

§ 1.3 Electric Field<br />

Definition: Electric Field<br />

If a particle with charge q a is placed at a point in space and F a is<br />

the net electric force on this particle due to all other charges, then<br />

the electric field at that point in space is the ratio of the force on<br />

the particle and the charge of the particle.<br />

⃗E = ⃗ F a<br />

q a<br />

You can think of the electric field as the force per charge in the<br />

same way that pressure is the force per area. It is important to understand<br />

the following points about the electric field:<br />

• The electric field does not depend on the test charge q a in any way.<br />

• The electric field represents the effect of all the other charges.<br />

• The electric field is different at each point in space.<br />

We will now work a specific example in order to demonstrate these<br />

three properties of the electric field. It is important to follow the details<br />

of the computation in this example very closely since there is much to<br />

learn from it. Consider the configuration of two charges shown below.


12 Electric Field 1.3<br />

0.4<br />

0.2<br />

y (m)<br />

r a<br />

r b<br />

2.0 nC<br />

r c<br />

-3.0 nC<br />

0.0<br />

0.0<br />

0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0<br />

We calculated this configuration in a previous example where the test<br />

charge q a was at the point ⃗r a = (0.2î + 0.4ĵ)m and we found that the<br />

force at this point was<br />

x (m)<br />

⃗F a = q a (37.5 î − 42.5 ĵ) N C<br />

so that the electric field at this point is<br />

F<br />

⃗E(0.2m, 0.4m) = ⃗ a<br />

= (37.5 î − 42.5 ĵ) N q a<br />

C<br />

We can find the electric field at other points ⃗r a as well.<br />

⃗E(⃗r a ) = ⃗ F a<br />

q a<br />

= ⃗ F ab<br />

q a<br />

+ ⃗ F ac<br />

q a<br />

= q b ⃗r a − ⃗r b<br />

4πɛ 0 |⃗r a − ⃗r b | 3 + ⃗r a − ⃗r c<br />

4πɛ 0 |⃗r a − ⃗r c | 3<br />

We will stop at this point to notice that the charge q a has already<br />

dropped out of the equation. So that we can write the electric field at<br />

an arbitrary location ⃗r as<br />

⃗E(⃗r) =<br />

q b ⃗r − ⃗r b<br />

4πɛ 0 |⃗r − ⃗r b | 3 + q c ⃗r − ⃗r c<br />

4πɛ 0 |⃗r − ⃗r c | 3<br />

This observation will be used after this example is finished. Let us now<br />

find the electric field at various other points. Let ⃗r = xî + yĵ so that<br />

the electric field at ⃗r is<br />

⃗E(x, y) =<br />

q b ⃗r − ⃗r b<br />

4πɛ 0 |⃗r − ⃗r b | 3 + q c ⃗r − ⃗r c<br />

4πɛ 0 |⃗r − ⃗r c | 3<br />

(x − 0.8)î + (y − 0.5)ĵ<br />

= 18 N C<br />

[(x − 0.8) 2 + (y − 0.5) 2 ] − 27 (x − 0.7)î + (y − 0.2)ĵ<br />

3/2 N<br />

C<br />

[(x − 0.7) 2 + (y − 0.2) 2 ] 3/2<br />

Evaluating this at a few locations we find the following.<br />

q c<br />

⃗E(0, 0.4) = (22î − 17ĵ) N C<br />

⃗E(0, 0.3) = (28î − 14ĵ) N C<br />

⃗E(0, 0.1) = (33î − 2ĵ) N C<br />

⃗E(0, 0.0) = (32î + 3ĵ) N C<br />

⃗E(0, 0.2) = (32î − 9ĵ) N C<br />

⃗E(0, −0.1) = (28î + 8ĵ) N C<br />

The fields at these six points are graphed as the six bold arrows on<br />

the left side of the following plot. The field is graphed at many other


1.3 Electric Field 13<br />

points a well.<br />

+2<br />

-3<br />

This graph gives some idea of how the field changes as you move around<br />

in the space. The graph is a little confusing in the region where the<br />

arrows cross each other.<br />

This happens wherever the field is strong.<br />

Because of this there is another kind of graph that is usually used to<br />

map out the electric field. Take a look at the following graph, which<br />

has both styles of maps together.


14 Electric Field 1.3<br />

+2<br />

-3<br />

The second style has curved field lines that follow the direction of the<br />

electric field. Check to see that the arrows are parallel to the field lines<br />

at the base of the arrow. This type of graph clearly shows the direction<br />

of the field. You can get an idea of the magnitude of the field by how<br />

close the field lines are to each other: the field is strong where the field<br />

lines are close together. Here is a graph showing just the field lines.


1.3 Electric Field 15<br />

Look back now to the middle of the example, where we observed<br />

that in the calculation of the electric field the test charge q a had<br />

dropped out of the equation. We observed, at that time, that the<br />

electric field at any location ⃗r in space could be written out as<br />

⃗E(⃗r) =<br />

q b ⃗r − ⃗r b<br />

4πɛ 0 |⃗r − ⃗r b | 3 + q c ⃗r − ⃗r c<br />

4πɛ 0 |⃗r − ⃗r c | 3<br />

⃗r−⃗r s<br />

|⃗r−⃗r s| 3<br />

We see the contribution of each source charge is of the form<br />

qs<br />

4πɛ 0<br />

and that the net field is the sum of the contributions of each source<br />

charge. This is so because the net force is the vector sum of the individual<br />

force. Following this idea we would arrive at these two theorems.<br />

Theorem: Electric Field due to a Point Charge<br />

The electric field at the location ⃗r due to a point charge q s at the<br />

location ⃗r s is given by the following expression.<br />

⃗E(⃗r) =<br />

q s ⃗r − ⃗r s<br />

4πɛ 0 |⃗r − ⃗r s | 3<br />

The magnitude of the electric field due to a point charge at a<br />

distance r from the point charge is<br />

E(r) =<br />

q 1<br />

4πɛ 0 r 2<br />

Theorem: Superposition Theorem<br />

The electric field due to a collection of point charges is the sum of<br />

the fields of the individual charges.<br />

⃗E(⃗r) = ∑ q n ⃗r − ⃗r n<br />

4πɛ<br />

n 0 |⃗r − ⃗r n | 3<br />

⊲ Problem 1.3<br />

A charge q 1 = +q is placed at the location ⃗r 1 = 0î + aĵ and a second<br />

charge q 2 = −q is placed at ⃗r 2 = 0î − aĵ.<br />

(a) Write out the electric field at an arbitrary location on the x-axis:<br />

⃗r = xî + 0ĵ.<br />

(b) Sketch a map of the electric field lines, in the first quadrant. Here<br />

is a table that gives the angle ( from the positive x-axis) of the electric<br />

field at different locations in the first quadrant.


16 Electric Field 1.5<br />

x/a = 0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0<br />

y/a = 0.0 -90 -90 -90 -90 -90 -90 -90<br />

0.5 -90 -54 -48 -52 -57 -61 -65<br />

1.0 45 -3 -11 -20 -29 -36 -42<br />

1.5 90 42 19 5 -7 -16 -23<br />

2.0 90 61 39 23 11 1 -8<br />

2.5 90 69 51 36 24 13 5<br />

3.0 90 74 58 45 33 24 15<br />

§ 1.4 Vector and Scalar Fields<br />

Definition: Scalar Field<br />

A scalar field is an entity that has a magnitude at each point in<br />

space.<br />

The potential energy is a scalar field, the quantity U = mgy gives<br />

the amount of potential energy at each point (⃗r = xî+yĵ) in space.<br />

Definition: Vector Field<br />

A vector field is an entity that has a magnitude and direction at<br />

each point in space.<br />

Gravity is a vector field, the constant g = 9.8 m s<br />

is the magnitude<br />

2<br />

of the field near the surface of the earth, and the direction is toward the<br />

earth. If you move away from the surface of the earth the gravitational<br />

field decreases in strength. The gravitational field is similar to the<br />

electric field in the sense that they both give the force on a body. The<br />

gravitational field gives the force on a massive body.<br />

⃗F G = m⃗g<br />

While, the electric field gives the force on a charged body.<br />

⃗F E = q ⃗ E<br />

Definition: Uniform Field<br />

A uniform vector field is a vector field that has the same magnitude<br />

and direction at all points in space. A uniform scalar field is a<br />

scalar field that has the same value at all points in space.


1.5 Continuous Charge Distributions 17<br />

§ 1.5 Continuous Charge Distributions<br />

In principle one could compute the electric field in any situation<br />

by summing the fields of each proton and electron in the system. In<br />

practice this is not done because there are too many electrons and<br />

protons. In this section we will see how to compute the electric field<br />

when there are too many charges to count.<br />

Suppose that we have a string that has been rubbed on a cat until<br />

the string has built up a charge Q that is spread uniformly over the<br />

length of the string. We then take the string and stretch it out in a<br />

straight line. We wish to calculate the electric field due to the string.<br />

For convenience assume that the string is stretched out along the x-axis<br />

from x = −L/2 to x = L/2.<br />

One way of finding the electric field is to conceptually break the<br />

string into short little sections, say N of them. Each of the sections<br />

will be a length dx = L/N, and carry a charge dq = Q/N. We can<br />

number the sections from 1 to N, and then the n’th section will be<br />

at the position ⃗r n = x n î (x n = nL/N − L/2). As long as we break<br />

the string into enough sections so that dx is small, we can treat each<br />

section as a point charge and then we can compute the electric field as<br />

a sum of N point charges<br />

⃗E(⃗r) = ∑ q n ⃗r − ⃗r n<br />

4πɛ<br />

n 0 |⃗r − ⃗r n | 3 = ∑ dq ⃗r − ⃗r n<br />

4πɛ<br />

n 0 |⃗r − ⃗r n | 3<br />

Keep in mind when you look at this formula that the vector ⃗r n points<br />

to the charge q n . With this formula and the aid of a computer it<br />

is possible to compute the electric field for nearly any distribution of<br />

charge that you can imagine.<br />

It is also possible, in some cases, to find a closed form solution,<br />

without using a computer. If we take the limit as N goes to infinity,<br />

the sum becomes an integral and the electric field can be written in the<br />

form<br />

∫<br />

dq ⃗r − ⃗r s<br />

⃗E(⃗r) =<br />

4πɛ 0 |⃗r − ⃗r s | 3<br />

Here again we imagine that we break the object into many small pieces<br />

of charge dq, the vector ⃗r s points toward dq, ranging over all dq’s and


18 Electric Field 1.5<br />

that we “sum” over all the pieces.<br />

Let us evaluate this integral for the case of the string that we<br />

introduced earlier. First we need to relate dq to dx. The entire length<br />

L of the string has a charge Q so that the charge per length is λ = Q/L.<br />

If the charge is uniformly spread over the string we expect the charge<br />

per length to be the same everywhere so that<br />

dq<br />

dx = Q = λ −→ dq = λdx<br />

L<br />

With this, and the fact that ⃗r s = x s î, we can write<br />

∫<br />

dq ⃗r − ⃗r s<br />

⃗E(⃗r) =<br />

4πɛ 0 |⃗r − ⃗r s | 3<br />

∫ L/2<br />

λdx s ⃗r − x s î<br />

=<br />

−L/2 4πɛ 0 |⃗r − x s î| 3<br />

If we write the field point as ⃗r = xî + yĵ, and then do the integration,<br />

we find that<br />

⎡<br />

⎤<br />

⃗E(x, y) =<br />

λ ⎣<br />

1<br />

1<br />

− √<br />

⎦ î<br />

4πɛ 0<br />

√y 2 + (x − L 2 )2 y 2 + (x + L 2 )2<br />

⎡<br />

⎤<br />

+ λ 1 x −<br />

⎣−<br />

L 2<br />

x + L 2<br />

+ √<br />

⎦ ĵ<br />

4πɛ 0 y<br />

√y 2 + (x − L 2 )2 y 2 + (x + L 2 )2<br />

⊲ Problem 1.4<br />

Suppose that you have a circular hoop of radius R with a net charge<br />

Q spread uniform around the hoop. Compute the electric field at a<br />

distance z along the axis of the hoop?


1.6 Gauss’s Law 19<br />

§ 1.6 Gauss’s Law<br />

We have seen that the electric field due to any charge distribution<br />

can be computed. From this relationship between the electric field and<br />

the charge distribution, another one can be derived.<br />

First we will define a new quantity, the electric flux through a<br />

surface. To get an idea of what the flux represents first consider the<br />

following story. You wish to catch some butterflies but you don’t have<br />

time to chase them around, so you just set up your butterfly net on<br />

a pole. The butterflies are migrating south for the winter. They are<br />

flying by your house heading in a southerly direction, so you orient the<br />

net so that it faces north. The number of butterflies you catch should<br />

be proportional to both the density of butterflies in the air and the<br />

area of the mouth of the net. The number of butterflies caught will<br />

also depend on the orientation of the net relative to the direction the<br />

butterflies are moving. For example, if the butterflies end up flying to<br />

the south-west instead of directly south, you will not catch as many<br />

since the net was not facing the optimal direction.<br />

The electric flux is similar, it is the amount of electric field that<br />

“passes through” a surface. There are three things that determine the<br />

quantity of electric flux: the area of the surface, the magnitude of the<br />

electric field and the orientation of the field relative to the surface.<br />

To write this out clearly, we need to have a way to mathematically<br />

represent the orientation of a surface. We will define a vector area ⃗ A<br />

as the vector that has a magnitude equal to the area of the surface and<br />

has a direction that is normal to the surface. A good picture to keep<br />

in mind is a thumbtack,<br />

A<br />

A<br />

the nail part of the tack is the vector area and the flat part of the<br />

tack is the surface. This ends up being the best way to use a vector to<br />

represent a surface. Now we can define the electric flux.


20 Electric Field 1.6<br />

Definition: Electric Flux<br />

The electric flux (φ e ) through a surface is<br />

φ e = ⃗ E · ⃗A<br />

if the field is uniform over the surface. If the field is not uniform<br />

then one must integrate over the surface,<br />

∫<br />

φ e = ⃗E · dA ⃗<br />

We see that the dot product represents the dependence of the flux<br />

on the relative orientation of the surface and the field. When thinking<br />

of the flux integral over a surface it can be helpful to imagine gluing<br />

tacks to the surface with the nail part sticking out, so that you end up<br />

with a spiky covering of the surface. Each tack represents one small<br />

surface element dA ⃗ and the integral is the sum of the flux’s through all<br />

of the small surface element.<br />

Now we can state the theorem that relates the electric field to the<br />

charge density.<br />

Theorem: Gauss’s Law<br />

The electric flux out of any closed surface is proportional to the<br />

total charge enclosed within the surface.<br />

∮<br />

⃗E · dA ⃗ = Q in<br />

ɛ 0<br />

Note that the integral of the electric field over the surface does<br />

not depend on the charge density outside the surface in any way. For<br />

example if there is no charge inside the surface then the integral must<br />

be zero.<br />

Example<br />

We can use Gauss’s law in order to find the electric field strength.<br />

Here is an example of how this can be done. The result of this example<br />

is also generally useful.


1.6 Gauss’s Law 21<br />

Suppose that you have a block of material which has charges inside<br />

that move freely. We will show later that in side the block the electric<br />

field is zero and that outside but near the block the field is normal to<br />

the surface. Also we will see later that there is no net charge inside the<br />

block, but that on the surface there can be a surface charge density.<br />

Let us form a Gaussian surface in the shape of a small tin can that is<br />

half inside and half outside the material, with the can oriented so that<br />

the ends of the can are parallel to the surface of the material.<br />

Since the field is zero inside the material we know that the flux is zero<br />

through the half of the can that is inside the material. We also know<br />

that the flux is zero through the sides of the can because the field is<br />

normal to the surface of the material. So we see that the only flux<br />

through the surface of the can is the flux through the top of the can.<br />

Assuming that the can is small enough so that the field is uniform over<br />

the can, then the flux through the top is<br />

∫<br />

⃗E · dA ⃗ = E ⃗ · ⃗A = EA<br />

top<br />

where A is the cross sectional area of the can. We have now computed<br />

the left hand side of Gauss’s law. The right hand side is the charge<br />

inside the gaussian surface. Since the charge is only on the surface we<br />

can find the charge inside the can as the area of the surface that is<br />

inside the can A times the surface charge density σ: so Q in = Aσ. And<br />

∮<br />

∫<br />

bottom<br />

⃗E · ⃗ dA = Q in<br />

ɛ 0<br />

∫<br />

∫<br />

⃗E · dA ⃗ + ⃗E · dA ⃗ + ⃗E · dA ⃗ = Q in<br />

sides<br />

top ɛ 0<br />

−→ 0 + 0 + EA = Aσ −→ E = σ ɛ 0 ɛ 0<br />

In the previous example, the determination of the flux was greatly


22 Electric Field 1.6<br />

simplified because we picked a the gaussian surface so that the electric<br />

field was either normal to the surface or in the plane of the surface.<br />

For example, the field was in the plane of the sides of the can in the<br />

previous example, thus the flux was zero through the sides. Further,<br />

in the previous example, the electric field was normal to the part of<br />

the gaussian surface that did not have a zero flux, in addition the field<br />

strength was uniform over this part of the surface. Thus the first thing<br />

to do, when you are using Gauss’s law to find the electric field strength,<br />

is to choose the gaussian surface so that the field is either parallel or<br />

normal to all parts of the surface.<br />

⊲ Problem 1.5<br />

Four closed surfaces are near three charges as shown.<br />

S 3<br />

S 4<br />

-Q<br />

+Q<br />

S 2<br />

-2Q<br />

S 1<br />

Find the electric flux through each surface.<br />

⊲ Problem 1.6<br />

A charge q is placed at one corner of a cube. What is the electric flux<br />

through each face of the cube.<br />

⊲ Problem 1.7<br />

Use Gauss’s law to show that the field strength at a distance r from a<br />

q 1<br />

point charge is<br />

4πɛ 0 r<br />

. 2<br />

⊲ Problem 1.8<br />

A solid sphere of radius R has a total charge of Q uniformly distributed<br />

throughout its volume. Calculate the magnitude of the electric field at<br />

a distance r from the center of the sphere. Be sure to consider the cases<br />

of r < R and r > R separately.<br />

⊲ Problem 1.9<br />

A sphere of radius a carries a volume charge density ρ = ρ 0 (r/a) 2 .<br />

Find the electric field inside and outside the sphere.<br />

⊲ Problem 1.10<br />

Use Gauss’s law to show that the electric field near a line charge with<br />

uniform charge density λ is given by E =<br />

λ<br />

2πɛ 0r<br />

where r is the distance<br />

from the line.


1.7 More Examples 23<br />

⊲ Problem 1.11<br />

Consider a long cylindrical charge distribution of radius R with a uniform<br />

charge density ρ. Find the electric field at a distance r from the<br />

axis for r < R.<br />

⊲ Problem 1.12<br />

A spherical shell of radius R carries a net charge of Q uniformly distributed<br />

over it’s surface.<br />

(a) Find the electric field strength at a point inside the shell.<br />

(b) Find the electric field strength at a point outside the shell.<br />

§ 1.7 More Examples<br />

Example<br />

Return to the pithballs in the example in section 1: assume the length<br />

of each string is 10cm. If the masses have the same net electric charge,<br />

what is the magnitude of the charge on each mass? Can you determine<br />

the sign of the net charge on each ball?<br />

Use the following diagram to determine the distances between the<br />

masses:<br />

L<br />

θ/2<br />

L = 10cm<br />

d<br />

d = 2L sin θ 2 = 2(10cm) sin 5◦ = 1.7cm.<br />

Assume each mass has a charge q, then using Coulomb’s law:<br />

F E = 1 q 2<br />

4πɛ 0 d 2 −→ q2 = F Ed 2<br />

1<br />

4πɛ 0<br />

.<br />

√<br />

(0.0034N)(.017m)<br />

−→ q =<br />

2<br />

9 × 10 9 N · m 2 /C 2 = 1.0 × 10−8 C<br />

The sign of the charge cannot be determined; all that can be said is<br />

the net charge on the masses have the same sign.<br />

Example<br />

Three particles with electric charge are attached to a meter stick, as<br />

shown. The value of Q is 1 × 10 −6 C (= 1µC). (a) What is the electric<br />

force on the center charge? (b) To what position could the center charge<br />

be moved so that the net electric force on it is zero?


24 Electric Field 1.7<br />

0.5m<br />

+3Q<br />

+Q +2Q<br />

(a) The electric forces on the center charge due to the other two charges<br />

are:<br />

The net force is<br />

F<br />

2Q<br />

Q<br />

F<br />

3Q<br />

F net = F 3Q − F 2Q<br />

= 1<br />

4πɛ 0<br />

=<br />

Q(3Q)<br />

(0.5m) 2 − 1<br />

4πɛ 0<br />

Q(2Q)<br />

(0.5m) 2<br />

(<br />

)<br />

( )<br />

9 × 10 9 N·m2<br />

3 − 2<br />

(1 × 10 −6 C) 2<br />

C 2 (0.5m) 2 = +3.6mN<br />

(b) There are three regions to consider: in between the 2Q and 3Q<br />

charges, outside of these charges to the left and outside of these charges<br />

to the right. Here are force diagrams for placing the charge Q outside<br />

of the two larger charges:<br />

F<br />

3Q<br />

F<br />

3Q<br />

F<br />

2Q<br />

+Q<br />

+3Q<br />

+2Q<br />

+Q<br />

F<br />

2Q<br />

Since the forces point in the same direction, there is no location outside<br />

of the two larger charges where the net electric force on the charge Q<br />

can be zero. For positions inside the two larger charges, the forces will<br />

point in opposite directions, as seen in part (a), and will cancel at the<br />

position where the forces have equal magnitudes. Let’s measure the<br />

location from the+3Q charge:<br />

F<br />

2Q<br />

F 3Q<br />

+3Q<br />

+2Q<br />

The net force on the charge +Q at a position x is<br />

F net = F 3Q − F 2Q<br />

= 1 Q(3Q)<br />

4πɛ 0 x 2 − 1 Q(2Q)<br />

4πɛ 0 (1 − x) 2<br />

x


1.7 More Examples 25<br />

The net force is to be zero:<br />

1 Q(3Q)<br />

4πɛ 0 x 2 − 1 Q(2Q)<br />

4πɛ 0 (1 − x) 2 = 0<br />

−→ 3(1 − x) 2 − 2x 2 = 0<br />

Solving the resulting quadratic equation yields two answers: x = 5.45m<br />

and x = 0.55m. The latter value is the answer, since we already argued<br />

that the position must lie between the two larger charges.<br />

⊙ Do This Now 1.4<br />

Analyze the configuration in the previous example, except replace the +3Q<br />

charge with a −3Q charge.<br />

(a) −0.18N (b)4.45m to the right of the +2Q charge.<br />

Example<br />

Four charges are located at the corners of a square as shown in the<br />

diagram below. A fifth charge is located at the center of the square.<br />

For the charge values indicated compute the net electric force on the<br />

charge at the center of the square.<br />

25cm<br />

+4μC<br />

+1μC<br />

+4μC<br />

Draw a force diagram:<br />

+4μC<br />

-1μC<br />

+2μC<br />

+1μC<br />

F +2<br />

45 o<br />

y<br />

x<br />

F -1<br />

F +1<br />

45 o<br />

F +4<br />

-1μC<br />

+2μC<br />

The distances between each corner charge and the center charge are<br />

the same:<br />

√ (a ) 2 ( a<br />

) √<br />

2 2<br />

d = + =<br />

2 2 2 a,


26 Electric Field 1.7<br />

where a = 25cm. To find the net force, add all the forces using vector<br />

addition:<br />

⃗F net = îF x + ĵF y ,<br />

where<br />

F x = (F +4 − F +2 − F +1 − F −1 ) sin(45 ◦ )<br />

F y = (−F +4 + F +2 − F +1 − F −1 ) cos(45 ◦ )<br />

Use Coulomb’s law to compute the magnitude of each force:<br />

F +4 = (9 × 109 )(4 × 10 −6 )(4 × 10 −6 )<br />

( √2 ) 2<br />

= 4.6N<br />

2 (.25)<br />

F +1 = F −1 = (9 × 109 )(1 × 10 −6 )(4 × 10 −6 )<br />

( √2<br />

2 (.25) ) 2<br />

= 1.15N<br />

F +2 = (9 × 109 )(2 × 10 −6 )(4 × 10 −6 )<br />

( √2<br />

2 (.25) ) 2<br />

= 2.3N<br />

Finally, compute the components of the net force:<br />

F x = (4.6N − 2.3N − 1.15N − 1.15N) sin(45 ◦ ) = 0<br />

F y = (−4.6N + 2.3N − 1.15N − 1.15N) cos(45 ◦ ) = −3.25N<br />

So, the net force points straight down with a magnitude of 3.25N.<br />

Example<br />

Consider the configuration of three charges along a line as shown below.<br />

Assuming the only forces acting are mutual electric forces between the<br />

charges, show that the configuration is in equilibrium, meaning that<br />

the net force on each charge is zero.<br />

a<br />

a<br />

+4q -q<br />

+4q<br />

Here is a force diagram for all the charges:<br />

+4q -q<br />

+4q<br />

The net force on the center charge must be zero, since the two forces<br />

are in opposite directions and caused by equal charges that are the<br />

same distance away. One down, two to go. Use the force law to write


1.7 More Examples 27<br />

out the net force on the leftmost charge:<br />

F L = 1 (4q)(q)<br />

4πɛ 0 a 2 − 1 (4q)(4q)<br />

4πɛ 0 (2a) 2<br />

= 1 (4q)(q)<br />

4πɛ 0 a 2 − 1 (4q)(q)<br />

4πɛ 0 a 2<br />

= 0<br />

So the net force on the leftmost charge is zero. Since the rightmost<br />

charge is the mirror image of the leftmost charge, it also has no net<br />

force acting on it. Thus, all three charges have a net force of zero acting<br />

on them for the configuration given, and the system is in equilibrium.<br />

Is the equilibrium stable?<br />

By stability we mean the following. If we move one of the charges<br />

a little bit, does the configuration return to the original equilibrium<br />

configuration, or does the configuration fall apart? Let’s move one of<br />

the charges a little bit and see what happens. Move the left most charge<br />

a small distance ɛ to the left. If the configuration is stable, then the<br />

net force on it must push it to the right. Check:<br />

a+ε<br />

a<br />

The net force is now:<br />

+4q -q<br />

+4q<br />

ε<br />

F L ′ = 1 (4q)(q)<br />

4πɛ 0 (a + ɛ) 2 − 1 (4q)(4q)<br />

4πɛ 0 (2a + ɛ) 2<br />

If this force points to the right, it will push the charge back from<br />

where it came and the equilibrium can be stable. If the force is to the<br />

left, the charge will be pushed away from the equilibrium position and<br />

the equilibrium can not be stable. With a little algebraic muscle the<br />

formula above for F L ′ can be rewritten:<br />

(<br />

)<br />

F L ′ =<br />

q2 1<br />

πɛ 0 a 2 (1 + ɛ − 1<br />

a )2 (1 + ɛ<br />

2a )2<br />

It is easy to see that this is a negative number since the denominator<br />

in the subtracted term is smallest, no matter how small ɛ is, as long<br />

as it is larger than zero. Thus, the force on the leftmost charge points<br />

to the left and the charge is pushed away from the original equilibrium<br />

position. The equilibrium is unstable.<br />

⊙ Do This Now 1.5


28 Electric Field 1.7<br />

Determine what the other two charges in the previous example do when the<br />

leftmost charge is moved to the left.<br />

They accelerate towards each other<br />

⊙ Do This Now 1.6<br />

An electron accelerates east due to an electric field. What direction does the<br />

electric field point?<br />

west<br />

Example<br />

A dust particle with mass 2µg has a net electric charge 3µC. The<br />

piece of dust is in a region of uniform electric field and is observed to<br />

accelerate at a rate of 180 m s 2 . What is the magnitude of the electric<br />

field in that region of space?<br />

The net force on the dust particle can be computed using Newton’s<br />

second law:<br />

F net = (2 × 10 −9 kg)(180 m s 2 ) = 3.6 × 10 −7 N.<br />

Using the definition of electric field and assuming no other forces act<br />

on the dust particle:<br />

E = F q = 3.6 × 10−7 N<br />

3 × 10 −6 C = 0.12 N C .<br />

Example<br />

If a proton is placed in the same electric field from the previous example,<br />

what is the resulting acceleration?<br />

Work backwards:<br />

F = qE = (1.6 × 10 −19 C)(0.12N/C) = 1.9 × 10 −20 N<br />

a = F m =<br />

1.9 × 10−20 N<br />

1.67 × 10 −27 kg = 1.15 × 107 m s 2<br />

Example<br />

Three charges lie along a line as shown below. What is the electric<br />

field at a position that is a horizontal distance a to the right of the −q<br />

charge?<br />

-4q +2q -q<br />

2a<br />

a<br />

Here is a diagram indicating the electric field due to each charge at the<br />

point:


1.7 More Examples 29<br />

-4q +2q -q<br />

E -1<br />

E -4<br />

E +2<br />

2a<br />

a<br />

a<br />

In the diagram, the electric field due to the −4q charge has been labeled<br />

E −4 , etc. The electric field at the point indicated is just the<br />

superposition of the individual electric fields:<br />

E = E +2 − E −1 − E −4 = 1 (2q)<br />

4πɛ 0 (2a) 2 − 1 q<br />

4πɛ 0 a 2 − 1 (4q)<br />

4πɛ 0 (4a) 2<br />

−→ E = − 3 q<br />

16πɛ 0 a 2 .<br />

Example<br />

Using the configuration of charges in the previous example, determine<br />

the electric field a vertical distance a above the +2q charge.<br />

First, let’s add a coordinate system, since this problem will involve<br />

vectors in two dimensions:<br />

y<br />

E +2<br />

(0, a)<br />

E -4<br />

E -1<br />

-4q θ 1<br />

+2q θ 2 -q<br />

x<br />

(-2a, 0) (0, 0) (a, 0)<br />

The angles θ 1 and θ 2 can be computed using some geometry:<br />

cos θ 1 = √ 2 sin θ 1 = √ 1<br />

5 5<br />

cos θ 2 = √ 1 sin θ 2 = √ 1<br />

2 2<br />

To compute the electric field at the point (0, a), we add the individual<br />

electric fields as vectors:


30 Electric Field 1.7<br />

E +2<br />

θ 1<br />

θ 2<br />

E -4<br />

E -1<br />

⃗E = î(−E −4 cos θ 1 + E −1 cos θ 2 )<br />

+ ĵ(−E −4 sin θ 1 − E −1 sin θ 2 + E +2 )<br />

Use Coulomb’s law to compute the magnitudes of the electric field<br />

contribution from each charge:<br />

E −4 = 1 (4q)<br />

4πɛ 0 ( √ 5a) = 1 4q<br />

2 4πɛ 0 5a 2<br />

E +2 = 1 (2q)<br />

4πɛ 0 a 2 = 1 2q<br />

4πɛ 0 a 2<br />

Finally,<br />

(<br />

⃗E = î − 1<br />

+ ĵ<br />

E −1 = 1<br />

4πɛ 0<br />

4πɛ 0<br />

(<br />

− 1<br />

4πɛ 0<br />

(q)<br />

( √ 2a) = 1<br />

2 4πɛ 0<br />

q 2 √5<br />

5a 2 + 1<br />

4πɛ 0<br />

4q 1 √5<br />

5a 2 − 1<br />

4πɛ 0<br />

q<br />

2a 2<br />

)<br />

q 1 √2<br />

2a 2<br />

q 1 √2<br />

2a 2 + 1 )<br />

2q<br />

4πɛ 0 a 2<br />

−→ E ⃗ = 1 q<br />

(−î(0.36) + ĵ(1.29))<br />

4πɛ 0 a2 Flux example:<br />

Example<br />

A uniform electric field passes through a 1cm×1cm square in the xy<br />

plane. The electric field is ⃗ E = (5 N C )î + (3 N C )ˆk. What is the electric<br />

flux through the square?<br />

z<br />

y<br />

x<br />

Since the electric field is constant: ∫<br />

φ E = ⃗E · dA ⃗ = E ⃗ · ⃗A.


1.7 More Examples 31<br />

The area vector points in the ˆk direction, so<br />

(<br />

)<br />

φ E = (5 N C )î + (3 N C )ˆk · (0.01m) 2ˆk = 0.03<br />

N·m 2<br />

C<br />

Gauss’s Law Examples:<br />

Example<br />

A 1.5 × 10 −9 C point charge is located at the center of a cylinder. The<br />

electric flux through the sides of the cylinder is known to be 100 N·m2<br />

C .<br />

What is the electric flux through one of the endcaps?<br />

By Gauss’s law:<br />

∫<br />

sides<br />

−→<br />

⃗E · ⃗A +<br />

100 N·m2<br />

C<br />

∫<br />

caps<br />

∫<br />

∮<br />

caps<br />

+ ∫<br />

caps<br />

⃗E · ⃗A = Q in<br />

⃗E · ⃗A =<br />

⃗E · ⃗A = 169 N·m2<br />

C<br />

ɛ 0<br />

⃗E · ⃗A = 169 N·m2<br />

C<br />

1.5 × 10−9 C<br />

8.85 × 10 −12 C 2<br />

N·m 2<br />

N·m2<br />

− 100<br />

C<br />

= 69 N·m2<br />

C<br />

This is the flux through both caps. Since the charge is located symmetrically<br />

with respect to the two endcaps, the flux through one cap is<br />

just half this: 34.5 N·m2<br />

C .<br />

Example<br />

A large, thin rectangular plate has a uniform charge density σ distributed<br />

over its area:<br />

σ<br />

Assuming that the plate is so large that the electric field above and<br />

below the plate is uniform, compute the magnitude of the electric field.


32 Electric Field 1.8<br />

With the assumptions above, symmetry tells us that the electric field<br />

will point in a direction perpendicular to the surface; for a positive<br />

charge it will point away from the plate:<br />

E<br />

A<br />

σ<br />

E<br />

In the figure a Gaussian surface is indicated. Take it to be a small<br />

cylinder with cross-sectional area A. The electric flux in non-zero only<br />

through the endcaps:<br />

∮<br />

∫<br />

∫<br />

∫<br />

⃗E · dA ⃗ = E · dA ⃗ + E · dA ⃗ + E · dA<br />

⃗<br />

upper cap<br />

sides<br />

= EA + 0 + EA = 2EA<br />

Using Gauss’s law:<br />

2EA = σA<br />

ɛ 0<br />

−→ E =<br />

σ<br />

2ɛ 0<br />

.<br />

lower cap<br />

§ 1.8 Homework<br />

⊲ Problem 1.13<br />

y<br />

7.0 µC<br />

x<br />

0.50 m<br />

0.50 m<br />

2.0 µC<br />

0.50 m<br />

−4.0 µC<br />

Three point charges are located at the corners of an equilateral triangle<br />

as shown. Calculate the net electric force on the 7.0µC charge.


1.8 Homework 33<br />

⊲ Problem 1.14<br />

Richard Feynman said that if two people were at arm’s length from<br />

each other and each person had 1% more electrons than protons, the<br />

force of repulsion between them would be about equal to the “weight”<br />

of the entire Earth. Was Feynman exaggerating?<br />

⊲ Problem 1.15<br />

A point charge q is at the position (x 0 , y 0 ). Find the electric field at<br />

an arbitrary point (x, y) due to the charge q.<br />

⊲ Problem 1.16<br />

<strong>Two</strong> 2.0 µC charges are located on the x axis at x = 1.0m and at<br />

x = −1.0m.<br />

(a) Determine the electric field on the y axis at y = 0.5.m.<br />

(b) Calculate the electric force on a −3.0µC charged place at this point.<br />

⊲ Problem 1.17<br />

A uniformly charged insulating rod of length 14 cm is bent into the<br />

shape of a semicircle. If the rod has a total charge of −7.5µC, find<br />

the magnitude and direction of the electric field at the center of the<br />

semicircle.<br />

⊲ Problem 1.18<br />

An electron moves at a speed of 3 × 10 6 m s<br />

into a uniform electric field<br />

of magnitude 1000 N/C. The field is parallel to the electron’s velocity<br />

and acts to decelerate the electron. How far does the electron travel<br />

before it is brought to rest?<br />

⊲ Problem 1.19<br />

A proton moves at 4.5 × 10 5 m s<br />

in the horizontal direction. It enters a<br />

uniform electric field of 9.6 × 10 3 N/C directed downward. Ignore any<br />

gravitational effects and find the time it takes the proton to travel 5.0<br />

cm horizontally, its vertical displacement after it has traveled 5.0 cm<br />

horizontally, and the horizontal and vertical components of its velocity<br />

after it has traveled 5.0 cm horizontally.<br />

⊲ Problem 1.20<br />

y<br />

x<br />

θ<br />

E


34 Electric Field 1.8<br />

A charged ball of mass 1.00 g is suspended on a light string in the<br />

presence of a uniform electric field as shown. When ⃗ E = (3.00î +<br />

5.00ĵ) × 10 5 N/C, the ball is in equilibrium at θ = 37.0 ◦ .<br />

(a) Find the charge on the ball.<br />

(b) Find the tension in the string.<br />

⊲ Problem 1.21<br />

A triangular box is in a horizontal electric field of magnitude E =<br />

7.8 × 10 4 N/C as shown<br />

30 cm<br />

10 cm 60°<br />

E<br />

(a) Compute the electric flux through each face of the box.<br />

(b) Compute the net electric flux through the entire surface of the box.<br />

⊲ Problem 1.22<br />

The nose cone of a rocket is in a uniform electric field of magnitude E 0<br />

as shown.<br />

E<br />

E<br />

It is parabolic in cross section, of length d and of radius r. Compute<br />

the electric flux through the paraboloidal surface.<br />

⊲ Problem 1.23<br />

A charge Q is at the center of a cube of side L.<br />

(a) Find the flux through each face of the cube.<br />

(b) Find the flux through the entire surface of the cube.<br />

(c) Would these answers change if the charge was not at the center?<br />

⊲ Problem 1.24<br />

A charge Q is located just above the center of the flat face of a solid<br />

hemisphere of radius R.<br />

(a) What is the electric flux through the curved surface.<br />

(b) What is the electric flux through the flat surface.<br />

⊲ Problem 1.25<br />

Find the electric field at the origin if there is a charged rod that goes<br />

from x = a to x = b assuming that the charge density of the rod is<br />

λ = cx n .<br />

d


1.9 Summary 35<br />

§ 1.9 Summary<br />

Definitions<br />

Electric Field:<br />

Electric Flux:<br />

⃗E = ⃗ F a<br />

q a<br />

dφ e = E ⃗ · dA ⃗<br />

∫<br />

φ e = ⃗E · dA ⃗<br />

Facts<br />

Coulomb’s Law<br />

⃗F ab = 1 ˆr ab<br />

q a q b<br />

4πɛ 0 rab<br />

2 = 1 ⃗r ab<br />

q a q b<br />

4πɛ 0 rab<br />

3<br />

Theorems<br />

Electric Field of a Point Charge:<br />

⃗E(⃗r) = 1 q ⃗r − ⃗r s<br />

4πɛ 0 |⃗r − ⃗r s | 3<br />

where ⃗r points to the field point and ⃗r s points to the charge q.<br />

Electric Field of a Distribution of Charge:<br />

⃗E(⃗r) = 1 ∫<br />

dq ⃗r − ⃗r s<br />

4πɛ 0 |⃗r − ⃗r s | 3<br />

where ⃗r points to the field point and ⃗r s points to the charge element<br />

dq.<br />

Gauss’ Law: ∮<br />

⃗E · dA ⃗ = Q in<br />

ɛ 0<br />

Superposition Theorem: If a charge distribution ρ 1 produces an<br />

electric field ⃗ E 1 and the charge distribution ρ 2 produces an electric<br />

field ⃗ E 2 then if both charge distributions are present the electric field<br />

is ⃗ E = ⃗ E 1 + ⃗ E 2 .


36 Electric Potential 2.9


2.1 Electric Potential 37<br />

2 Electric Potential<br />

§ 2.1 Electric Potential<br />

The Coulomb force is a conservative force and thus we can consider<br />

the potential energy of a particle in an electric field that is created by<br />

a static charge distribution. Suppose that you have a charged particle<br />

in an electric field, and that you move the particle from point A to<br />

point B. As the particle is moved, the electric field will do work on the<br />

particle.<br />

W A→B =<br />

=<br />

= q<br />

∫ B<br />

A<br />

∫ B<br />

A<br />

∫ B<br />

A<br />

⃗F E · ⃗dr<br />

q ⃗ E · ⃗dr<br />

⃗E · ⃗dr<br />

Thus when the particle is moved from A to B the change in the electric<br />

potential energy is<br />

∫ B<br />

∆U = −W A→B = −q ⃗E · ⃗dr<br />

A<br />

and the change in potential energy per charge is<br />

∫ B<br />

∆U<br />

= − ⃗E ·<br />

q<br />

⃗dr.<br />

A<br />

Notice that the potential energy per charge does not depend on the<br />

test charge q, it only depends on the electric field.<br />

Definition: Electric Potential<br />

The electric potential, V , is the electric potential energy per charge.<br />

The electric potential is related to the electric field:<br />

∫ B<br />

V B − V A = ∆V = ∆U = −<br />

q<br />

A<br />

For a uniform electric field this simplifies to<br />

∆V = ∆U = −E q<br />

⃗ · ∆⃗r<br />

⃗E · ⃗dr


38 Electric Potential 2.1<br />

It is important to notice that the definition of electric potential<br />

only tells us how to find the difference (V B − V A ) between the electric<br />

potential at two different points, A and B . The value of the electric<br />

potential itself is not defined. This is not a problem because only the<br />

difference has physical significance. You may recall that this is true<br />

for potential energy also. The potential energy at ten meters above<br />

the surface of the earth is not defined, but the difference between the<br />

potential energy at ten meters and three meters is defined, ∆U =<br />

mg∆y. One can choose some point in space that is defined to be<br />

the zero of the electric potential. This point is sometimes called the<br />

ground. Then in reference to ground, all points have an absolute electric<br />

potential. This is like choosing the surface of the earth as the zero of<br />

gravitational potential energy.<br />

Often the electric potential is simply referred to as the potential.<br />

The units of electric potential is evidently the units of energy divided<br />

by the units of charge. This unit occurs frequently and has it’s own<br />

name, the Volt.<br />

1Volt =<br />

1Joule<br />

1Coulomb<br />

This unit is abbreviated as V. Be warned that this is a bad coincidence<br />

since the symbol used for the electric potential is V , which is very<br />

similar to V. This is not a serious problem, but if you mix up the<br />

symbols, you can end up doing silly things with the algebra.<br />

Example<br />

Suppose that there is a uniform electric field ⃗ E = (0.2 N C<br />

)î. The electric<br />

potential difference between the two points ⃗r A = (1.0m)î+(2.0m)ĵ and<br />

⃗r B = (5.0m)î + (−3.0m)ĵ is computed as follows.<br />

V B − V A = ∆V = − ⃗ E · ∆⃗r<br />

= −(0.2 N C<br />

)î · [⃗r B − ⃗r A ]<br />

= −(0.2 N C<br />

)î · [(4.0m)î + (−5.0m)ĵ]<br />

= −(0.2 N C<br />

)(4.0m) + 0 = −0.8V<br />

This example demonstrates that the electric potential decreases as<br />

one moves in the direction of the electric field (positive x in this case).<br />

This is a general rule: the electric field points from regions of high<br />

electric potential to regions of low electric potential.


2.1 Electric Potential 39<br />

Example<br />

Suppose that an electron moved from a region where the electric potential<br />

is 150 volts to a region where the electric potential is 100 volts.<br />

There is only the electric field acting on the electron. What would be<br />

the change in the kinetic energy of the electron? We know that the<br />

potential energy and electric potential are related: ∆V = ∆U/q.<br />

so that<br />

∆K + ∆U = 0<br />

∆K = −∆U = −q∆V = −(−e)(100V − 150V) = −8.0 × 10 −18 J<br />

In this example we see that negatively charged particles slow down<br />

when they go from a region of high electric potential to a region of low<br />

electric potential. A positively charged particles would speed up.<br />

Example<br />

Now let’s try an example where the field is not uniform.<br />

⃗E = α [ y 2 î + 2xyĵ ]<br />

If we move from the origin to the point (a, b) what is the change in the<br />

electric potential. First we need to pick a path from the starting point<br />

to the ending point. A straight line will do. Let ⃗r(t) = x(t)î + y(t)ĵ =<br />

atî + btĵ, we see that as the parameter t is varied from 0 to 1, that<br />

the vector ⃗r(t) points along the path from the origin to the final point<br />

(a, b): that is ⃗r(t) is the trajectory of a particle following our path. This<br />

function is called a parameterization of the path. Now we can compute<br />

the line integral ∫ E ⃗ · dr ⃗ since we can now write<br />

⃗dr = d⃗r<br />

dt dt = [ dx<br />

dt î + dy<br />

dt ĵ<br />

]<br />

dt = [aî + bĵ] dt


40 Electric Potential 2.1<br />

so that<br />

∫ B<br />

∆V = −<br />

= −<br />

= −<br />

= −α<br />

= −α<br />

= −α<br />

A<br />

∫ 1<br />

0<br />

∫ 1<br />

0<br />

∫ 1<br />

0<br />

∫ 1<br />

0<br />

∫ 1<br />

0<br />

= −αab 2<br />

⃗E · ⃗dr<br />

⃗E(⃗r(t)) · d⃗r<br />

dt dt<br />

α [ y 2 î + 2xyĵ ] · [aî + bĵ] dt<br />

[ (bt)2î + 2(at)(bt)ĵ ] · [aî + bĵ] dt<br />

[<br />

(bt) 2 a + 2(at)(bt)b ] dt<br />

3ab 2 t 2 dt<br />

In general, to compute a line integral, one must first find a parameterization<br />

of the path.<br />

The following theorem gives a way of finding the electric field if<br />

the electric potential field is already know.<br />

Theorem: Electric Field from the Electric Potential<br />

[<br />

⃗E = −∇V ⃗ ∂V<br />

= −<br />

∂x î + ∂V<br />

∂y ĵ + ∂V ]<br />

∂z ˆk<br />

The symbol ⃗ ∇ represents the gradient operator ∂<br />

Thus the expression ⃗ ∇f is equal to ∂f<br />

∂x î + ∂f<br />

∂y ĵ + ∂f<br />

∂z ˆk.<br />

∂xî + ∂<br />

∂y ĵ + ∂ ∂z ˆk.<br />

Example<br />

The nonuniform electric field, ⃗ E = αy 2 î + 2αxyĵ, that we used in the<br />

previous example, has the electric potential V = −αxy 2 . Let us check<br />

the above theorem.<br />

⃗E = − ⃗ ∇V<br />

= ∂<br />

∂x αxy2 î + ∂ ∂y αxy2 ĵ + ∂ ∂z αxy2ˆk<br />

= αy 2 î + 2αxy ĵ + 0 ˆk OK


2.2 Equipotentials 41<br />

⊲ Problem 2.1<br />

You touch the terminals of a 9 Volt battery to your tongue. While it is<br />

touching your tongue a charge of 0.08 Coulombs passes through your<br />

tongue from one terminal to the other. How much energy is dissipated<br />

in your tongue, by the charged particles passing through it?<br />

⊲ Problem 2.2<br />

<strong>Two</strong> metal plates are held at an electric potential difference of 1000V.<br />

An electron is released from the plate that is at a lower electric potential.<br />

What is the speed of the electron when it reaches the other<br />

plate?<br />

⊲ Problem 2.3<br />

The electric field in a region is given by ⃗ E = ayî + axĵ, where a =<br />

2.0V/m 2 is a constant. What is the electric potential difference between<br />

the origin and the point x = 1.0m, y = 2.0m?<br />

⊲ Problem 2.4<br />

The electric potential in a region is given by V = axyz. What is the<br />

electric field?<br />

§ 2.2 Equipotentials<br />

Suppose that we have picked our zero for electric potential. Each<br />

point in space will now have it’s own value for electric potential. If we<br />

put a dot at every location that is at an electric potential of, say 4.3V,<br />

then the collection of all such dots will create a surface.<br />

Definition: Equipotential<br />

An equipotential is a surface on which the electric potential is constant.<br />

Below is a graph of a few equipotentials for the electric field produced<br />

by three point charges (front left is q = +1, back center is q = +2,<br />

and front right is q = −3).<br />

These 3D plots are difficult to generate and read, so often a section<br />

is cut through the surfaces, and only the cut edge of the surfaces are


42 Electric Potential 2.2<br />

shown. The following graph is a section through the equipotentials for<br />

the same three charges (there are a few more equipotentials drawn in<br />

this section graph).<br />

+2<br />

+1<br />

-3<br />

Below is a graph of the same equipotentials with a few electric field<br />

lines graphed also.<br />

+2<br />

+1<br />

-3<br />

Notice that while the field lines go from positive charges to negative<br />

charges, the equipotentials encircle charges. Also notice that wherever<br />

a field line crosses an equipoential, the field line is perpendicular to<br />

the equipotential. This must happen, as we will now show. Imagine<br />

that you move a charge a small distance ⃗ dr along the surface of an<br />

equipotential. The change in electric potential must be zero since the<br />

beginning and ending points are both on the same equipotential. But<br />

we also know that the change in electric potential is given by,<br />

dV = − ⃗ E · ⃗dr<br />

So since dV = 0, it must be the case that E ⃗ · ⃗dr = 0, and<br />

⃗E · ⃗dr = 0 −→ E ⃗ is perpendicular to dr ⃗<br />

since ⃗ E ≠ 0 and ⃗ dr ≠ 0.


2.3 Conductors in Equilibrium 43<br />

⊲ Problem 2.5<br />

(a) Sketch the equipotentials for two like charges.<br />

(b) Sketch the equipotentials for two opposite charges.<br />

§ 2.3 Conductors in Equilibrium<br />

A conductor allows it’s free charges to move through it with some<br />

amount of ease. So, if there is a force acting on a free charge then that<br />

charge will move. Thus if there is an electric field inside a conductor<br />

then the free charges in the conductor will move. In some situations,<br />

for example if the conductor is electrically insulated, the charges will<br />

eventually reach an equilibrium configuration in which they no longer<br />

move around. This makes sense, since if you apply a field to an isolated<br />

conductor the charges will move around to adjust to the new force but in<br />

the end they must settle down into the equilibrium configuration, which<br />

is the state with the lowest energy. But this tells us something about<br />

the electric field inside a conductor once it has reached equilibrium.<br />

Since the charges are not moving, there can be no electric field inside<br />

the conductor.<br />

Theorem: Conductor in Equilibrium: Field<br />

The electric field is zero inside a conductor at equilibrium.<br />

This in turn tells us that there can be no net charge inside the<br />

volume of a conductor if the conductor is in equilibrium. We can argue<br />

this as follows. Suppose that there was a net charge in some volume<br />

inside a conductor. By Gauss’s Law we know that there must be a<br />

net electric flux through the surface of this volume, but the flux is the<br />

integral of the electric field over the surface, so the electric field cannot<br />

be zero if there is a region with a net charge. But by the previous<br />

theorem we know that if there is an electric field inside a conductor then<br />

the conductor is not in equilibrium. Thus there can be a net charge<br />

inside a conductor only if the conductor is not at equilibrium.<br />

Theorem: Conductor in Equilibrium: Charge<br />

There is no net charge in any volume inside a conductor in equilibrium.<br />

If a charge is placed on a conductor it will reside on the<br />

surface of the conductor.<br />

We can arrive at one more very important result by using the fact<br />

that there is no field in a conductor in equilibrium. Since the field is<br />

zero, this means that ∆V = − ∫ ⃗ E · ⃗ dr = 0 for any path inside the<br />

conductor. This tells us that a conductor in equilibrium is all at the<br />

same electric potential.


44 Electric Potential 2.4<br />

Theorem: Conductor in Equilibrium: Potential<br />

All points in a conductor at equilibrium have the same electric<br />

potential.<br />

Theorem: Conductor in Equilibrium: Surface Field<br />

The field at the outside surface of a conductor in equilibrium is<br />

normal to the surface of the conductor. The magnitude of the<br />

field is E = σ ɛ 0<br />

where σ is the surface charge density.<br />

We can see that the previous theorem must be true by considering<br />

that the surface of the conductor is an equipotential, and noting that<br />

the electric field is normal to any equipotential surface.<br />

⊲ Problem 2.6<br />

There is a solid conductor with a cavity within it. Floating within this<br />

cavity there is a second conductor. This has been drawn below with a<br />

quarter of the outer conductor removed so that you can see the inner<br />

conductor.<br />

A total charge Q a is place on the inner conductor and a charge Q b is<br />

placed on the outer conductor.<br />

(a) What is the amount of charge on the inside surface of the outer<br />

conductor?<br />

(b) What is the amount of charge on the outer surface of the outer<br />

conductor?<br />

⊲ Problem 2.7<br />

A conducting spherical shell having an inner radius of 4.0 cm and outer<br />

radius of 5.0 cm carries a net charge of +10µC. If a +2.0µC point charge<br />

is placed a the center of this shell, determine the surface charge density<br />

on the inner and outer surfaces.


2.4 Capacitors 45<br />

§ 2.4 Capacitors<br />

Suppose that we place two conductors near each other. Now suppose<br />

that we remove a quantity of charge Q from one conductor and<br />

place it on the other. One conductor will end up with a charge +Q and<br />

the other will end up with a charge −Q. In addition an electric field<br />

will be created between the conductors.<br />

Since there is an electric field between the conductors, there will also<br />

be an electric potential difference between the two conductors.<br />

∆V = V + − V − = −<br />

∫ ⃗r+<br />

⃗r −<br />

⃗ E · ⃗ dr<br />

Because the electric field strength is proportional to the charge Q, the<br />

electric potential difference will also be proportional to Q.<br />

∆V ∝ Q<br />

Example<br />

Here is a specific example of this general result. Place two conducting<br />

plates parallel to each other as shown, and charge the top plate to a<br />

net charge Q and the other plate to a net charge −Q<br />

In a previous example it was shown that the electric field strength near<br />

a plate with uniform charge density σ is E = σ/2ɛ 0 . Between the<br />

plates the fields of the two plates are in the same direction (toward<br />

the negatively charged plate) so that the strength of the net field is<br />

twice the field strength of each plate alone. So the net field between<br />

the plates is E = σ/ɛ 0 . If the area of the plate is A then the charge


46 Electric Potential 2.4<br />

density is σ = Q/A so that we find,<br />

E =<br />

Q<br />

Aɛ 0<br />

As long as the separation between the plates d is much less than the<br />

width of the plates the electric field will be effectively uniform between<br />

the plates, so that the potential difference between the plates is<br />

∆V = V + − V − = − ⃗ E · ∆⃗r<br />

Since ∆⃗r points from the negative plate to the positive plate and E ⃗<br />

points the opposite direction, the dot product of these two vectors is<br />

negative the product of the magnitudes; E ⃗ · ∆⃗r = −Ed.<br />

∆V = −(−Ed) =<br />

Q d =<br />

d Q<br />

Aɛ 0 Aɛ 0<br />

We see then that the electric potential difference is proportional to the<br />

charge on the plates.<br />

Since the electric potential difference is proportional to the charge,<br />

the ratio is a constant.<br />

Q<br />

∆V<br />

Definition: Capacitance<br />

The capacitance, C, of two conductors is the ratio of the charge on<br />

the conductors to the electric potential difference.<br />

C =<br />

Q or Q = C ∆V<br />

∆V<br />

The unit of capacitance is a Farad and is equal to a Coulomb per<br />

Volt: F = C V .<br />

⊲ Problem 2.8<br />

A 6.0µF capacitor is connected to a 1.5 Volt battery so that a electric<br />

potential difference of 1.5 volts is maintained between the two conductors<br />

of the capacitor. What is the charge on each of the conductors?<br />

⊲ Problem 2.9<br />

Show that the capacitance of two parallel plates is C = ɛ 0 A/d, where<br />

d is the distance between the plates and A is the area of the plates.<br />

⊲ Problem 2.10<br />

Show that the capacitance of two concentric spherical conducting shells<br />

4πɛ<br />

is 0<br />

1/a−1/b<br />

, where a and b are the radii of the shells.<br />

⊲ Problem 2.11<br />

Coaxial cables are commonly used to carry high frequency signals. Your<br />

cable for your cable-TV is a coaxial cable. A coaxial cable consists of


2.5 Energy in an Electric Field 47<br />

a wire (radius a) surrounded by a cylindrical conducting shield (radius<br />

b) Show that the capacitance for a length L of coaxial cable is 2πɛ0L<br />

ln(b/a) .<br />

⊲ Problem 2.12<br />

Consider two long, parallel, and oppositely charged wires of radius a<br />

with their centers separated by a distance b. Assuming the charge<br />

is distributed uniformly on the surface of each wire, show that the<br />

capacitance per unit length of this pair of wires is<br />

C<br />

l = πɛ o<br />

ln( b a − 1)<br />

§ 2.5 Energy in an Electric Field<br />

Let us consider how much work must be done to charge a capacitor.<br />

Suppose that we have already moved an amount of charge q from the<br />

negative plate to the positive plate of the capacitor, so that the electric<br />

potential difference between the plates is ∆V = q/C. In order to move<br />

a little bit more charge dq to the positive plate, we need to do an<br />

amount of work<br />

dW = dU = dq ∆V = dq q C<br />

The total amount of work to bring the capacitor from a charge of q = 0<br />

to a charge of q = Q is<br />

U =<br />

∫ Q<br />

0<br />

dq q C = Q2<br />

2C<br />

=<br />

(C∆V )2<br />

2C<br />

= 1 2C(∆V )2<br />

Theorem: Energy Stored in a Capacitor<br />

A capacitor charged to an electric potential difference of V C stores<br />

an amount of energy<br />

U = 1 2 CV 2 C<br />

This energy is stored in the electric field that has been created<br />

between the plates. The energy density (energy per volume) is<br />

u = energy 1<br />

1 ɛ<br />

volume = 2C(∆V )2<br />

0A<br />

2 d<br />

=<br />

(Ed)2 = 1<br />

V<br />

A d<br />

2 ɛ 0E 2<br />

In the intermediate step in the above equation, the properties of a parallel<br />

plate capacitor was used, but the final result is true in general.<br />

Theorem: Energy Density of an Electric Field<br />

The electric field contains an amount of energy per volume u.<br />

u = 1 2 ɛ 0E 2


48 Electric Potential 2.6<br />

⊲ Problem 2.13<br />

A 120µF capacitor is charged to an electric potential difference of 100V.<br />

(a) How much energy is stored in the capacitor?<br />

(b) If the field strength in a capacitor becomes to great then the charge<br />

will jump across the gap between the plates. Assume that this break<br />

down occurs when the field strength reaches 3 × 10 6 V m. What is the<br />

minimum volume that is required for a 120µF capacitor to be able to<br />

hold an electric potential difference of 100V?<br />

§ 2.6 Electric Potential of a Point Charge<br />

We wish to find the electric potential for a point charge. The<br />

electric field strength around a point charge is<br />

E =<br />

q 1<br />

4πɛ 0 r 2<br />

where r is the distance from the point charge. The electric field is<br />

either pointed away or toward the charge depending on if the charge is<br />

positive or negative. Let us start with the positive charge.<br />

V b − V a = −<br />

∫ rb<br />

r a<br />

⃗ E · ⃗ dr<br />

If we let r b > r a then dr ⃗ is pointed outward. This is the same direction<br />

as E ⃗ so that E ⃗ · ⃗dr = E dr. Thus<br />

∫ rb<br />

V b − V a = − E dr = − q ∫ rb<br />

1<br />

r a<br />

4πɛ 0 r a<br />

r 2 dr = − q [− 1 ] rb<br />

4πɛ 0 r<br />

r a<br />

= q 1<br />

−<br />

q 1<br />

4πɛ 0 r b 4πɛ 0 r a<br />

Thus we see that the electric potential at a distance r from a point<br />

charge is<br />

V (r) =<br />

q 1<br />

4πɛ 0 r + constant<br />

For simplicity one normally chooses for the constant to be zero. Note<br />

that this choice for the constant implies that the zero of the electric<br />

potential is at the position r = ∞.<br />

Theorem: Electric Potential of a Point Charge<br />

V (r) =<br />

q 1<br />

4πɛ 0 r<br />

⊲ Problem 2.14<br />

Show that V (r) =<br />

q 1<br />

4πɛ 0 r<br />

is correct for a negative charge as well.


2.7 More Examples 49<br />

⊲ Problem 2.15<br />

An electron is released from a distance of 2.0 cm from a proton. How<br />

fast will the electron be going when it is 0.5 cm from the proton?<br />

(Assume that the proton does not move.)<br />

§ 2.7 More Examples<br />

Example<br />

An electric field is given by E ⃗ = (3<br />

C·m<br />

)x 2 î). What is the electric<br />

2<br />

potential difference between the points (1m, 0, 0) and (3m, 0, 0)? What<br />

is the minimum work needed to move a +6µC charge between the two<br />

points, starting from (1m, 0, 0)?<br />

Since the electric potential is path independent (it comes from a conservative<br />

force), we can integrate along any path we want; choose the<br />

x-axis:<br />

∫<br />

∫3m<br />

( )<br />

∆V = − ⃗E · (îdx) = − 3 N<br />

x 2 dx<br />

C·m 2<br />

( ) [<br />

−→ ∆V = − 3 N x 3 ] 3<br />

= −26 N·m<br />

C·m 2 3<br />

= −26V<br />

1<br />

C<br />

N<br />

1m<br />

The work done by an external agent will be<br />

W = −W E = q∆V = (6 × 10 −6 )(−26V) = −1.56 × 10 −4 J<br />

Example<br />

The figure below is a schematic representation of an electron “gun.”<br />

A potential difference is maintained between the left and right plates,<br />

with the right plate having a higher potential. By heating the left<br />

plate, an electron is “boiled” off the plate. The electron, starting from<br />

rest, then moves toward the right plate, directed toward a small hole in<br />

the plate so that it “shoots” out of the gun. If the potential difference<br />

between the plates is 9V, how fast will the electron be moving when it<br />

reaches the right plate?<br />

- +<br />

s = ?<br />

ΔV


50 Electric Potential 2.7<br />

The change in potential energy of the electron will be:<br />

Use conservation of energy:<br />

∆U = q∆V = (−e)∆V.<br />

∆U + ∆K = −e∆V + ( 1 2 m ev 2 − 0) = 0<br />

√ √<br />

2e∆V 2(1.6 × 10<br />

−→ v = =<br />

−19 C(+9V)<br />

m e 9.11 × 10 −31 kg<br />

= 1.78 × 10 6 m s<br />

Example<br />

Near the surface of the Earth, there is always a background electric<br />

field that averages 100N/C and points down. Assuming the Earth to be<br />

a perfect conductor, how much electric charge is stored on the Earth’s<br />

surface?<br />

Since the electric field points down, we know the Earth’s charge is negative.<br />

So, lets find the magnitude. Use the previous result to determine<br />

the surface charge density:<br />

E = σ ɛ 0<br />

−→ σ = Eɛ 0 .<br />

Multiply this by the Earth’s surface area to get the total charge:<br />

Q E = σ(4πR 2 E) = Eɛ 0 (4πR 2 E) = 453, 000C<br />

Example<br />

<strong>Two</strong> equal and opposite charges are located a distance a apart. Find<br />

the electric field and the electric potential at a) the point directly between<br />

the two charges and b) the point a distance a/2 directly above<br />

the point inbetween the two charges.<br />

+q -q<br />

The electric fields due to each charge point in the same direction at the<br />

center point c:<br />

a<br />

E +<br />

c<br />

+q -q<br />

E -


2.7 More Examples 51<br />

The resulting electric field at c is<br />

E c = E + + E −<br />

= 1 q<br />

4πɛ 0 ( a + 1<br />

2 )2 4πɛ 0<br />

q<br />

( a 2 )2<br />

= 2q<br />

πɛ 0 a 2<br />

To find the potential we will have to come up with a rule for what to<br />

do with more than a single point charge. As just illustrated, for the<br />

electric field due to a system of charges, the resulting field at any point<br />

is just the superposition of the electric fields due to all charges at that<br />

point:<br />

⃗E = ⃗ E 1 + ⃗ E 2 + ⃗ E 3 + · · ·<br />

This followed because the electric field came from a net force. Likewise,<br />

because the electric potential is defined using the electric field, at any<br />

point in space we will just add up the potentials due to all the individual<br />

charges to find the resulting potential:<br />

For our problem:<br />

V = V 1 + V 2 + V 3 + · · ·<br />

V c = V + + V −<br />

= 1 q<br />

4πɛ 0 ( a 2 ) + 1 (−q)<br />

4πɛ 0 ( a 2 )<br />

= 0<br />

Now repeat the analysis for the second point, labeled d:<br />

E +<br />

d<br />

45 o<br />

45 o<br />

y<br />

a/2<br />

E -<br />

x<br />

+q<br />

a/2<br />

a/2 -q<br />

The electric field is<br />

⃗E d = î(E + + E − ) cos 45 ◦ + ĵ(E + − E − ) sin 45 ◦<br />

Compute the magnitudes of the individual fields:<br />

E + = E − = 1 q<br />

4πɛ 0<br />

=<br />

q<br />

2πɛ 0 a 2<br />

( √ 2<br />

2 a)2


52 Electric Potential 2.7<br />

And,<br />

The potential is:<br />

⃗E d = î(2E + ) + ĵ(0)<br />

√ √<br />

q 2 2q<br />

E d = 2<br />

2πɛ 0 a 2 2 = 2πɛ 0 a 2<br />

V d = V + + V − = 1<br />

4πɛ 0<br />

(<br />

q<br />

( √ 2<br />

2<br />

)<br />

(−q)<br />

+<br />

a) ( √ 2<br />

2 a)<br />

= 0<br />

The potential is zero at both points! The electric field is not zero, and<br />

it points in the x direction at both points. You should be able to argue<br />

for any point lying on the line defined by the points c and d that the<br />

electric field always points in the x direction and the potential is always<br />

zero.<br />

⊙ Do This Now 2.1<br />

For the configuration in the previous example, compute the electric potential<br />

at a point that is distance a above the +q charge.<br />

q<br />

8πɛ0 a(2 −<br />

√<br />

2)<br />

Example<br />

A charge Q is distributed uniformly along a line L that lies along the<br />

x-axis. Compute the electric potential a distance x from the left end<br />

of the charge distribution that is on the x-axis. Take the potential at<br />

∞ to be zero.<br />

Locate the origin at the point we want to compute the electric potential<br />

(labeled P ):<br />

x<br />

P<br />

x'<br />

dx'<br />

Consider the very small section of length dx ′ of the line that is at x ′ .<br />

The amount of charge contained in this small section is<br />

dq ′ = Q L dx′ .<br />

Since the section is very small, we can treat it as a point charge and<br />

the potential it causes at P is<br />

dV ′ = 1 Q<br />

L dx′<br />

4πɛ 0 x ′ ,<br />

where we have used the potential for a point charge, which takes the<br />

potential at ∞ to be zero. To find the total electric potential at P we


2.8 Homework 53<br />

add up potential due to each small section making up the entire line:<br />

∫<br />

x+L ∫ Q<br />

V (x) = dV ′ 1<br />

L<br />

=<br />

dx′<br />

4πɛ 0 x ′<br />

x<br />

= Q ( ) x + L<br />

4πɛ 0 L ln x<br />

Let’s check that this gives the expected result for L → 0, which will<br />

result in Q being a point charge. We need the limit:<br />

( ) (<br />

x + L<br />

lim ln = lim ln 1 + L )<br />

≈ L<br />

L→0 x L→0 x x<br />

So<br />

lim V (x) = Q<br />

L→0 4πɛ 0 L · L<br />

x = Q<br />

4πɛ 0 x ,<br />

which is indeed the electric potential a distance x from a point charge<br />

Q.<br />

§ 2.8 Homework<br />

⊲ Problem 2.16<br />

Through what potential difference would an electron need to be accelerated<br />

for it to achieve a speed of 40% of the speed of light, starting<br />

from rest?<br />

⊲ Problem 2.17<br />

How much work is required to move one mole of electrons from a region<br />

where the electric potential is 9V to a region where the electric potential<br />

is -5V?<br />

⊲ Problem 2.18<br />

An electron moving along the x axis has an initial speed of 2.7×10 6 m s<br />

at<br />

the origin. Its speed is reduced to 1.4 × 10 5 m s<br />

at the point x = 2.0cm.<br />

Calculate the potential difference between the origin and this point.<br />

Which point is at the higher potential?<br />

⊲ Problem 2.19<br />

In Rutherford’s experiments alpha particles (charge +2e, mass 6.6 ×<br />

10 −27 kg) were fired at a gold nucleus (charge +79e). An alpha particle<br />

initially very far from the gold nucleus is fired at 2.0 × 10 7 m s<br />

directly<br />

toward the center of the nucleus. How close does the alpha particle get<br />

to this center before turning around?<br />

⊲ Problem 2.20<br />

Show that the amount of work required to assemble four identical<br />

charges Q at the corners of a square of side s is 5.41kQ 2 /s.


54 Electric Potential 2.8<br />

⊲ Problem 2.21<br />

In a certain region of space the electric potential is V = 5x−3x 2 y+2yz 2 .<br />

Find the expressions for the x, y, and z components of the electric field<br />

in this region. What is the magnitude of the field at the point P , which<br />

has coordinates (1, 0, −2)m?<br />

⊲ Problem 2.22<br />

A rod of length L lies along the x axis with its left end at the origin<br />

and has a nonuniform charge density λ = αx. What are the units of<br />

α? Calculate the electric potential at the point x = −b on the x axis.<br />

⊲ Problem 2.23<br />

A wire that has a uniform linear charge density λ is bent into the shape<br />

shown below. Find the electric potential at the center of the circular<br />

part.<br />

2R<br />

R<br />

2R<br />

⊲ Problem 2.24<br />

There is a point charge near by. You determine that the electric potential<br />

at your location (due to the point charge) is 3000V and the electric<br />

field strength is 500 V m.<br />

(a) How far away is the charge?<br />

(b) What is the value of the charge?<br />

⊲ Problem 2.25<br />

Three charges are placed on the x-axis. <strong>Two</strong> charges Q at x = d and<br />

x = −d, and a third charge −2Q at x = 0.<br />

(a) Show that the electric potential along the x-axis is V =<br />

2kQd2<br />

x(x 2 −d 2 ) .<br />

(b) Show that the electric field along the x-axis is E ⃗ = 2kQd2 (3x 2 −d 2 )<br />

x 2 (x 2 −d 2 )<br />

î. 2<br />

(c) In the limit that x ≫ d, show that the field is proportional to 1/x 4<br />

and that the potential is proportional to 1/x 3 .<br />

⊲ Problem 2.26<br />

You have drop of conductive fluid with a net charge of Q 0 and a radius<br />

r 0 . The electric field and electric potential at the surface of this drop<br />

(due to the charge on the drop) are E 0 and V 0 . <strong>Two</strong> such drops join<br />

together to form a larger drop.<br />

(a) What is the radius of the larger drop?<br />

(b) What is the surface charge density of the larger drop?<br />

(c) What is the electric field at the surface of the larger drop?<br />

(d) What is the electric potential at the surface of the larger drop?


2.8 Homework 55<br />

⊲ Problem 2.27<br />

How much work is required to bring a total charge Q to a spherical<br />

shell of radius R?<br />

⊲ Problem 2.28<br />

You have two concentric spherical shells of radius a and b. The smaller<br />

shell has a charge of q 1 = 10nC and the larger shell has a charge of<br />

q 2 = −15nC.<br />

a<br />

b<br />

(a) Find the electric field at all points in space.<br />

(b) Find the electric potential at all points in space.<br />

(c) Sketch the electric potential as a function of the distance from the<br />

center of the shells, for a = 0.15m and b = 0.30m.<br />

⊲ Problem 2.29<br />

<strong>Two</strong> conductors having net charges of +10.0µC and −10.0µC have a<br />

potential difference of 10.0V. Determine the capacitance of the system<br />

and the potential difference between the two conductors if the charges<br />

on each are increased to +100.0µC and −100.0µC.<br />

⊲ Problem 2.30<br />

<strong>Two</strong> conductors insulated from each other are charged by transferring<br />

electrons from one conductor to the other. After 1.6 × 10 12 electrons<br />

have been transferred, the potential difference between the conductors<br />

is 14V. What is the capacitance of the system?<br />

⊲ Problem 2.31<br />

Einstein showed that energy is associated with mass according to the<br />

famous relationship, E = mc 2 . Estimate the radius of an electron,<br />

assuming that its charge is distributed uniformly over the surface of a<br />

sphere of radius R and that the mass-energy of the electron is equal to<br />

the total energy stored in the resulting nonzero electric field between<br />

R and infinity.


56 Electric Potential 2.9<br />

§ 2.9 Summary<br />

Definitions<br />

Electric Potential:<br />

Capacitance:<br />

∆V = ∆U<br />

q<br />

C =<br />

Q<br />

∆V<br />

Equipotential: an equipotential is a surface over which the electric<br />

potential is a constant.<br />

Theorems<br />

dV = − ⃗ E · ⃗dr<br />

∆V = −<br />

∫ rf<br />

r i<br />

⃗ E · ⃗ dr<br />

[ ∂V<br />

⃗E = −<br />

∂x î + ∂V<br />

∂y ĵ + ∂V ]<br />

∂z ˆk<br />

≡ − ⃗ ∇V<br />

Conductors in Equilibrium:<br />

• Field - the field is zero in the volume of a conductor, and at the<br />

surface it is normal to the surface.<br />

• Charge - the net charge in the volume of a conductor is zero.<br />

• Potential - the potential in the volume of a conductor is constant.<br />

Electric Potential of a Point Charge:<br />

V = 1 q<br />

4πɛ o r<br />

Electric Potential of a Distributed Charge:<br />

V (⃗r) = 1 ∫<br />

dq<br />

4πɛ o |⃗r − ⃗r s |<br />

Energy Density of an Electric Field<br />

E = 1 2 ɛ oE 2<br />

Energy Stored on a Capacitor:<br />

U = 1 2 CV 2 C


3.2 Electric Current 57<br />

3 Circuits<br />

§ 3.1 Introduction<br />

When you turn on a flashlight, a flow of electrons is passed through<br />

the light bulb. Inside the light bulb is a small filament. As the electrons<br />

pass through the filament they loose energy and in the process the<br />

filament heats up. The filament gets so hot that it glows, this is how<br />

the bulb produces light.<br />

The electrons are supplied from the negative terminal of the battery<br />

and flow to the light bulb through a metal wire. After the electrons<br />

pass through the filament they are carried back to the positive terminal<br />

of the battery by another wire.<br />

A system of electrical devices connected with wires, such as the<br />

flashlight system, is called an electric circuit. Circuits are often represented<br />

in a wiring diagram. The following circuit diagram represents<br />

the flashlight system.<br />

+<br />

–<br />

In this diagram there are three elements and the wires that connect<br />

them. The element on the left is the battery, with the positive terminal<br />

being wider and marked with a + sign. The element on the top is the<br />

switch that turns the flashlight off and on. The element on the right is<br />

the light bulb.<br />

This chapter will be an investigation of electrical circuits and the<br />

common electrical devices from which circuits are built.<br />

§ 3.2 Electric Current<br />

A flow of charge, such as the charge flowing through the light bulb<br />

filament, is called an electric current.


58 Circuits 3.3<br />

Definition: Current<br />

The electric current, I, is defined to be the amount of charge that<br />

flows per time.<br />

I = dq<br />

dt<br />

The unit of current is coulombs per second. This<br />

combination of units is called the Ampere or Amp,<br />

abbreviated as just A: (1A = 1C<br />

1s ).<br />

Definition: Current Density<br />

Let A be a small area that is normal<br />

to the flow of current in a particular<br />

region. Let I be the current flowing<br />

through the area A. The current density,<br />

⃗J, is a vector in the direction of the flow<br />

of current. The magnitude of the current<br />

density is equal to the current per area.<br />

J = I A<br />

⊲ Problem 3.1<br />

A light bulb draws a current of 1.0 mA from a battery.<br />

(a) How many electrons pass through the bulb in 160 seconds?<br />

(b) The filament has a radius of 0.20 mm. What is the current density<br />

through the filament?<br />

§ 3.3 Ohm’s Law<br />

When an electric field is applied to a conductor the free charges in<br />

the conductor begin to move. If the conductor is isolated the charges<br />

will distribute themselves so that the field inside the conductor is zero<br />

and then the charges will cease to move. One the other hand, if the<br />

conductor is not isolated but part of a circuit, as the filament was in<br />

the flashlight circuit, then a continual flow of charge can be sustained,<br />

and the electric field in the conductor will not be zero.


3.3 Ohm’s Law 59<br />

Some materials, such a copper, allow charge to pass through it<br />

with very little resistance, and therefore it takes very little electric field<br />

to sustain a large current. Other materials, such a carbon, resist the<br />

flow of charge, and it requires more electric field to sustain the same<br />

current. Carbon is more resistive. This property is quantified in the<br />

following law.<br />

Fact: Ohm’s Law: Resistivity<br />

For many materials the current density and the electric field are<br />

proportional.<br />

⃗J = σ ⃗ E<br />

The constant σ is called the conductivity and depends on the material.<br />

The inverse of the conductivity is called the resistivity:<br />

ρ = 1/σ.<br />

Not all materials follow this relationship: those that do are called<br />

ohmic materials, those that do not are called non-ohmic.<br />

Here is a table with the resistivity of a few materials.<br />

Material Resistivity(×10 −8 Ω · m)<br />

Silver 1.6<br />

Copper 1.7<br />

Aluminum 2.8<br />

Tungsten 5.5<br />

Iron 10<br />

Nichrome 100<br />

Carbon 3500<br />

Silcon 64000000000<br />

Wood 1000000000000000<br />

Amber 50000000000000000000000<br />

Imagine a piece of conductive material, with two terminals connected<br />

to it, and with a current I passing into the material through<br />

terminal a and draining out through terminal b. Such a circuit element<br />

is called a Resistor.<br />

In order to sustain this current there will need to be an electric field<br />

in the conductor going from terminal a to terminal b. Thus there will


60 Circuits 3.4<br />

be an electric potential difference ∆V = V a − V b = − ∫ a<br />

E ⃗ · ⃗dr between<br />

b<br />

the two terminals. It can be shown that, regardless of the shape of<br />

the conductors, this electric potential difference is proportional to the<br />

current if the material is ohmic.<br />

Theorem: Ohm’s Law: Resistance<br />

∆V = IR<br />

Where R is called the resistance of the element.<br />

The unit of resistance is the ohm which is one volts per amp. The<br />

ohm is abbreviated as Ω, so that 1Ω = 1V/1A.<br />

⊲ Problem 3.2<br />

You have a wire with cross sectional area A and length L. Show that if<br />

the terminals are placed at the ends of this conductor that the resistance<br />

of this element is R = ρ L A .<br />

⊲ Problem 3.3<br />

You have a block of carbon, with sides of length a, 2a, and 3a. If<br />

terminals are placed on two parallel sides we can make a resistor with<br />

this block. We have three choices for the placement of the terminals,<br />

the sides that are a apart, 2a apart or 3a apart.<br />

(a) Which choice will produce the most resistance.<br />

(b) Which choice will produce the least resistance.<br />

§ 3.4 Electric Power<br />

Suppose that you have a circuit element with two terminals, that<br />

has a current I running through it and a potential difference ∆V between<br />

the terminals. In a time dt an amount of charge dq = I dt will<br />

pass through the element. All of that charge falls through the electric<br />

potential difference of ∆V so that the charge dq looses an amount of<br />

potential energy<br />

dU = dq ∆V = I dt ∆V −→ dU<br />

dt = I ∆V.<br />

So we see that the element dissipates a power P = I ∆V .<br />

Theorem: Electrical Power<br />

The power dissipated in a circuit element is equal to the product<br />

of the current through the element and the potential difference<br />

between the terminals of the element.<br />

P = I ∆V


3.5 Kirchhoff’s Rules 61<br />

⊲ Problem 3.4<br />

A 60 Watt light bulb is plugged into the wall receptacle which supplies<br />

an electric potential of 120 Volts. How much current runs through the<br />

bulb when you turn it on?<br />

⊲ Problem 3.5<br />

(a) Show that a resistor with a current I running through it has a power<br />

of P = I 2 R.<br />

(b) Show that a resistor with a voltage ∆V across it has a power of<br />

P = (∆V ) 2 /R.<br />

§ 3.5 Kirchhoff’s Rules<br />

There are two theorems that are very useful in analysing a circuit.<br />

The first theorem stems from the conservation of charge, that is, that<br />

charge is neither created nor destroyed in a circuit. Consider a junction<br />

where a number of elements come together.<br />

Since the current does not build up at the junction the sum of current<br />

going into the junction must be equal to the sum of the current going<br />

out of the junction. In the case pictured above: I 1 + I 4 = I 2 + I 3 .<br />

Theorem: Kirchhoff’s Junction Rule<br />

The sum of the currents into a junction is equal to the sum of the<br />

current out of a junction. ∑<br />

Iin = ∑ I out<br />

The second theorem stems from the conservation<br />

of energy. Since the electric potential is the potential<br />

energy per charge that is due to the electric field in<br />

the system, if a charge moves around a loop in a circuit<br />

and comes back to where it started it must be at<br />

the same electric potential as when it started. Thus<br />

if we add the electric potential differences of all the<br />

elements that are crossed as you go around any loop<br />

in the circuit the sum must be zero.


62 Circuits 3.6<br />

Theorem: Kirchhoff’s Loop Rule<br />

The sum of the electric potential differences around any closed<br />

loop in a circuit is zero.<br />

∑<br />

∆V = 0<br />

As an example consider the following circuit with five elements.<br />

+ –<br />

+ –<br />

ΔV 1<br />

ΔV 2<br />

+<br />

+<br />

ΔV 3<br />

ΔV 4<br />

–<br />

+ ΔV 5 –<br />

There are a number of loop rules that we could write down. First,<br />

consider the loop starting at the bottom left corner and then taking<br />

the shortest route going clockwise back to the bottom left corner. You<br />

cross elements 1 and 3, both time going from high to low potential.<br />

−∆V 1 − ∆V 3 = 0<br />

Now the equation cannot be satisfied by positive numbers so one of the<br />

∆V ’s must be negative. This is alright, the algebra will sort it out in<br />

the end.<br />

Now consider starting at the lower right corner and taking the<br />

shortest clockwise loop. We pass through elements 5, 3, 2, and 4.<br />

∆V 5 + ∆V 3 − ∆V 2 − ∆V 4 = 0<br />

Notice which ones are positive and which are negative.<br />

We could also do the big loop, starting at the lower left and going<br />

clockwise through elements 1, 2, 4, and 5.<br />

−∆V 1 − ∆V 2 − ∆V 4 + ∆V 5 = 0<br />

It is important to notice that this last equation could have been<br />

arrived at by combining the first two equations, so it has not really given<br />

us any new information. In general it does not help to write down more<br />

loop equations than there are “windows” in the circuit.<br />

§ 3.6 Resistors in Combination<br />

In a circuit where the same current runs through two resistors,<br />

those resistors are said to be in series. If we a circuit where the same<br />

electric potential is across two resistors, those resistors are said to be in<br />


3.6 Resistors in Combination 63<br />

parallel. The diagram below will help explain why these configurations<br />

are named in this way.<br />

Suppose that we have two resistors in series. Since they are in<br />

series they must carry the same current.<br />

I 1 = I 2 = I<br />

We also know that the potential difference across the pair is the sum<br />

of the potential differences across each individual resistor;<br />

∆V = ∆V 1 + ∆V 2<br />

= I 1 R 1 + I 2 R 2<br />

= IR 1 + IR 2<br />

= I(R 1 + R 2 )<br />

−→ R effective = R 1 + R 2<br />

We see that the pair of resistors in series still follow Ohm’s law, and<br />

that the pair act as a single resistor with an effective resistance of<br />

R effective = R 1 + R 2 .<br />

Series Resistors<br />

Parallel Resistors<br />

+<br />

–<br />

ΔV<br />

+<br />

ΔV 1<br />

–<br />

+<br />

ΔV 2<br />

–<br />

I 1<br />

I 2<br />

Now consider two resistors in parallel. Since they are in parallel<br />

the must have the same electric potential.<br />

∆V 1 = ∆V 2 = ∆V<br />

We also know from the junction rule that the net current going into the<br />

system is equal to the sum of the two currents going into the resistors.<br />

I = I 1 + I 2 = ∆V 1<br />

+ ∆V 2<br />

R 1 R<br />

[ 2<br />

1<br />

= ∆V + 1 ]<br />

R 1 R 2<br />

= ∆V<br />

R 1<br />

I<br />

+ ∆V<br />

R 2<br />

−→<br />

1<br />

R effective<br />

= 1 R 1<br />

+ 1 R 2


64 Circuits 3.7<br />

Theorem: Effective Resistance<br />

Series R = R 1 + R 2<br />

Parallel<br />

1<br />

R = 1 + 1 R 1 R 2<br />

§ 3.7 Capacitors in Combination<br />

Capacitors in series and parallel can also be treated as a single<br />

capacitor. The argument is much the same, but with charge rather<br />

than current.<br />

Suppose that you have two capacitors in series. Then the charges<br />

on each must be the same.<br />

Q 1 = Q 2 = Q<br />

While the potential drop across the pair is the sum of the potential<br />

drop across each<br />

∆V = ∆V 1 + ∆V 2<br />

+<br />

–<br />

−→<br />

Series Capacitors<br />

= Q 1<br />

+ Q 2<br />

= Q + Q C 1 C 2 C 1 C 2<br />

1<br />

C = ∆V<br />

Q = 1 + 1 C 1 C 2<br />

+<br />

Parallel Capacitors<br />

+Q<br />

ΔV 1<br />

-Q –<br />

+Q 1 +Q 2<br />

ΔV<br />

+Q +<br />

-Q<br />

ΔV 1<br />

-Q 2<br />

2<br />

-Q<br />

For capacitors in parallel the potential is the same.<br />

–<br />

∆V 1 = ∆V 2 = ∆V<br />

While the net charge that flows into the system is shared between the<br />

capacitors.<br />

Q = Q 1 + Q 2<br />

= C 1 ∆V 1 + C 2 ∆V 2 = C 1 ∆V + C 2 ∆V<br />

−→ C =<br />

Q<br />

∆V = C 1 + C 2


3.8 Capacitor Circuits 65<br />

Theorem: Effective Capacitance<br />

Series<br />

1<br />

C = 1 C 1<br />

+ 1 C 2<br />

Parallel C = C 1 + C 2<br />

§ 3.8 Capacitor Circuits<br />

Consider the following circuit, which is composed of a power supply<br />

with a fixed electric potential output of V S , a capacitor, a resistor, and<br />

a double pole switch.<br />

b<br />

+<br />

a<br />

V S +Q<br />

–<br />

I -Q<br />

+<br />

V C<br />

–<br />

–<br />

To begin with the switch is in position a. In this position all of<br />

the charge will drain from the capacitor. At the time t = 0 the switch<br />

is moved to position b. In this position the power supply will begin to<br />

fill the capacitor with charge. The current I flows into the capacitor.<br />

Thus the charge on the capacitor increases at the rate<br />

dQ<br />

dt = I<br />

But for a capacitor the charge is proportional to the electric potential<br />

across the capacitor Q = CV C so that<br />

I = dQ<br />

dt = C dV C<br />

dt<br />

Kirchhoff’s loop rule gives us the following equation.<br />

But by Ohm’s Law we have<br />

V R<br />

+<br />

V S − V C − V R = 0<br />

V R = RI = RC dV C<br />

dt<br />

Putting this into the loop rule equation we find<br />

V S − V C − RC dV C<br />

dt<br />

= 0


66 Circuits 3.8<br />

This is a differential equation that describes how the voltage on the<br />

capacitor changes with time, similar to how F = ma is a differential<br />

equation that describes how a particles position changes with time. In<br />

this particular case we can find the solution by noting that if we define<br />

a new variable, f(t) = V C − V S then df<br />

dt = dV C<br />

dt<br />

Plugging this into our differential equation we find<br />

−f − RC df<br />

dt = 0<br />

or<br />

df<br />

dt = − 1<br />

RC f<br />

since V S is a constant.<br />

This just says that the derivative of f is simply a constant times f.<br />

The only function that has this property is the exponential. So let us<br />

try a function of the form<br />

f = Ae αt −→ df<br />

dt = αAeαt = αf<br />

Comparing this with our differential equation we see that it is the same<br />

if<br />

α = − 1<br />

RC<br />

Thus<br />

V C − V S = f = Ae −t/RC<br />

−→ V C = V S + Ae −t/RC<br />

In order to determine the constant A we need to use the initial condition<br />

of the system. At t = 0 we know that there was no charge on the<br />

capacitor, thus the electric potential on the capacitor was zero at t = 0.<br />

Putting this into the solution we fine that<br />

0 = V C (0) = V S + Ae −0/RC = V S + A −→ A = −V S<br />

So the voltage on the capacitor is<br />

V C = V S (1 − e −t/RC )<br />

The combination RC is called the time constant of the circuit because it<br />

has units of time and gives the time scale for the change in the voltage:<br />

in a time RC the difference of the electric potential from it’s final value<br />

(V S ) decreases by a factor of e −1 ≈ 3/8.


3.9 More Examples 67<br />

Note that the equation for V C does not depend on R or C separately,<br />

but only on the combination RC.<br />

⊲ Problem 3.6<br />

Suppose that the capacitor circuit described above is assembled with<br />

a 10 Volt power supply, a 5.0kΩ resistor, and a 3.0µF capacitor. How<br />

long after the switch is put in position b, will it be before the capacitor<br />

is half charged (5.0V)?<br />

⊲ Problem 3.7<br />

Assume that the capacitor circuit described above is left with the switch<br />

in position b for a long time, so that the capacitor is fully charged to<br />

the voltage V S . The switch is now moved to position a. Show that<br />

V C = V S e −t/RC .<br />

§ 3.9 More Examples<br />

Example<br />

The largest part of the nerve cells in your body is called the “axon.”<br />

The axon is in the shape of a cylinder and has sections through which<br />

ions pass, sending electrical signals through the nerve. During a nerve<br />

impuse, for the cylindrical section of an axon indicated below, 10,000<br />

sodium ions (Na + ) pass through the surface of the cell membrane in 1<br />

m/s. What is the current and current density into the cell?<br />

Na +<br />

20μm<br />

Na +<br />

100μm


68 Circuits 3.9<br />

Each sodium ion has a charge +1.6 × 10 −19 C, so for 10,000 ions, ∆Q =<br />

10, 000 × (1.6 × 10 −19 C) = 1.6 × 10 −15 C. Since it takes 1ms:<br />

I = ∆Q<br />

∆t = 1.6 × 10−15 C<br />

= 1 × 10 −12 A = 1pA.<br />

.001s<br />

The ions flow through the sides of the cylinder, so the magnitude of<br />

the current density is<br />

J = I S = 1.6 × 10 −12 A<br />

(2π)(10µm)(500µm) = 5.1 × A 10−5 m 2 = 51µA m 2<br />

Example<br />

A copper wire, with a diameter of 1mm, has a current of 5A flowing<br />

through it. What is the electric field in the wire?<br />

Comment: How can E ≠ 0? Earlier it was stated that E = 0 inside a<br />

conductor, however this was for the case of electrostatics. In the case<br />

of a current flowing, since electric charges are not static, the electric<br />

field will be nonzero.<br />

For our wire, the current density is<br />

J = I A = 5A<br />

π(0.0005m) 2 = 6.4 × A 106 m 2<br />

From Ohm’s law:<br />

J = 1 ρ E<br />

−→ E = ρJ = (1.7 × 10 −8 Ωm)(6.4 × 10 6 A m 2 )<br />

= 0.11 Ω·A<br />

= 0.11 V m<br />

m<br />

Example<br />

A light bulb with a resistance of 3Ω is connected to a 9V battery. In<br />

one second how many electrons flow through the bulb?<br />

I<br />

R = 3Ω<br />

-<br />

+<br />

9V<br />

Use Ohm’s law to find the current:<br />

I = ∆V<br />

R<br />

= 9V<br />

3Ω = 3A


3.9 More Examples 69<br />

This mean that in one second, 3C of charge flows through the resistor.<br />

Since each electron (which will flow in a direction opposite the<br />

conventional positive current) carries 1.6 × 10 −19 C of charge:<br />

3A<br />

N =<br />

1.6 × 10 −19 C × (1s) = 1.9 × 1016 electrons<br />

Example<br />

A 20W light bulb is left on in your car’s interior. If the car’s 12V<br />

battery is fully charged and has a capacity of 200Amp-hours. How<br />

long will it take to completely discharge the battery (assuming the<br />

terminal voltage remains 12V throughout the discharge)?<br />

Use electric power P to compute the current that flows:<br />

P = I∆V −→ I = P<br />

∆V = 20W<br />

12V = 1.67A<br />

The amount of charge that will pass through the bulb in a time ∆t<br />

is ∆Q = 1.67A × ∆t. The 200 Amp-hour rating tells us how much<br />

charge can pass from the positive terminal to the negative terminal of<br />

the battery before discharging the battery, so<br />

∆Q200Ahr = (1.67A)∆t<br />

−→ ∆t = 200Ahr<br />

1.67A<br />

How much charge has flowed?<br />

= 120hr = 5days<br />

200Ahr = 200A(3600s) = (200 C )(3600s) = 720, 000C<br />

s<br />

Example<br />

Determine the currents in the three resistors of the following circuit:<br />

12V<br />

6Ω<br />

-<br />

+<br />

6V<br />

+<br />

-<br />

3Ω<br />

9Ω<br />

Let’s label the currents. We will do our best to indicate the correct<br />

directions of the current:


70 Circuits 3.9<br />

6Ω<br />

12V<br />

-<br />

+<br />

6V<br />

+<br />

-<br />

I 1<br />

I 2 3Ω I 3<br />

9Ω<br />

A<br />

We now apply the loop rules to the two loops indicated. In both cases,<br />

start from the point labeled A, moving in the direction indicated, summing<br />

the potential gains or losses across each circuit element. For batteries<br />

the potential increases from the negative to the positive terminal.<br />

For resistors the current flows from high to low potential. Applying the<br />

loop rules gives two equations, on for each loop:<br />

−(3Ω)I 2 − (6Ω)I 1 + 6V = 0<br />

−(3Ω)I 2 + 12V − (9Ω)I 3 = 0<br />

We also must apply current conservation. Choose the point labeled A:<br />

I 1 − I 2 + I 3 = 0<br />

Now we have 3 equations with three unknowns. Solving the linear set<br />

of equations yields:<br />

I 1 = 0.364A<br />

I 2 = 1.27A<br />

I 3 = 0.91A<br />

Check that these are correct by putting them back into the loop equations:<br />

−(3Ω)(1.27A) − (6Ω)(0.364A) + 6 −→ −6.0V + 6.0V = 0<br />

−(3Ω)(1.27A) + 12 − (9Ω)(0.91A) −→ −12.0V + 12.0V = 0<br />

Example<br />

Determine the currents in the resistors of the following circuit:


3.9 More Examples 71<br />

15Ω<br />

5Ω<br />

10Ω<br />

15V<br />

+<br />

-<br />

10V<br />

+<br />

-<br />

15Ω<br />

Label the currents, including best guesses for the directions:<br />

I 1<br />

I 2<br />

I 3<br />

15Ω<br />

5Ω<br />

10Ω<br />

+<br />

-<br />

15V<br />

+<br />

-<br />

10V<br />

I 1<br />

A<br />

15Ω<br />

B<br />

Apply Kirchoff’s loop rules. First to the lefthand loop, beginning at<br />

point A and moving clockwise:<br />

15V − (15Ω)I 1 − (5Ω)I 2 + 10V − (15Ω)I 1 = 0,<br />

then to the righthand loop, beginning at point B and moving counterclockwise:<br />

(10Ω)I 3 − (5Ω)I 2 + 10V = 0.<br />

Note that for a resistor, the conventional positive current flows from<br />

high to low potential, which determines the sign to use when moving<br />

from one side of a resistor to the other.<br />

Now apply Kirchoff’s junction rule at the point labeled B:<br />

I 2 + I 3 − I 1 = 0<br />

Simplifying, we have three equations with three unknowns:<br />

25 − 30I 1 − 5I 2 = 0<br />

10 + 10I 3 − 5I 2 = 0<br />

I 2 + I 3 − I 1 = 0<br />

To solve, let first eliminate I 3 :<br />

10 + 10I 3 − 5I 2 = 10 + 10(I 1 − I 2 ) − 5I 2 = 0


72 Circuits 3.9<br />

−→ 10 + 10I 1 − 15I 2 = 0<br />

Next multiply the first equation, of the three listed above, by -3:<br />

−→ −75 + 90I 1 + 15I 2 = 0.<br />

Add the two modified equations together:<br />

10 + 10I 1 − 15I 2 − 75 + 90I 1 + 15I 2 = 0<br />

−→ −65 + 100I 1 = 0<br />

−→ I 1 = .65A<br />

Using this value of I ! , we can solve for I 2 and I 3 :<br />

I 2 = 1.1A<br />

I 3 = −0.45A<br />

The negative value obtained for I 3 indicates that the direction for<br />

this current is opposite the direction that was chosen. So I 3 flows<br />

up through the 10Ω resistor, not down as indicated in our diagram.<br />

⊙ Do This Now 3.1<br />

Repeat the analysis for the circuit in the previous example, using the current<br />

directions shown below:<br />

I 1<br />

I 2<br />

I 3<br />

15Ω<br />

5Ω<br />

10Ω<br />

+<br />

-<br />

15V<br />

+<br />

-<br />

10V<br />

I 1<br />

A<br />

15Ω<br />

B<br />

Example<br />

You should not get any negative-valued currents.<br />

What is the effective resistance between the points A and B for the<br />

following circuit.<br />

R = 30Ω<br />

4<br />

A<br />

R = 15Ω<br />

2<br />

R = 10Ω<br />

1<br />

R = 4Ω<br />

3<br />

B


3.9 More Examples 73<br />

First combine R 1 and R 2 . Since they are in parallel:<br />

1<br />

= 1 + 1 = 1<br />

R 12 R 1 R 2 10Ω + 1<br />

15Ω −→ R 12 = 6Ω<br />

The circuit has been reduced to:<br />

R = 30Ω<br />

4<br />

A<br />

R = 6Ω<br />

12<br />

R = 4Ω<br />

3<br />

Now combine R 12 and R 3 , which are in series:<br />

This leaves the effective circuit:<br />

R 123 = R 12 + R 3 = 6Ω + 4Ω = 10Ω.<br />

R = 30Ω<br />

4<br />

B<br />

A<br />

R = 10Ω<br />

123<br />

B<br />

Finally, combine the last two resistances in parallel:<br />

1<br />

= 1 + 1 = 1<br />

R AB R 123 R 4 10Ω + 1<br />

30Ω −→ R 12 = 7.5Ω<br />

Example<br />

A 12V battery is connected across the points AB in the circuit from the<br />

previous example. What current flows through the R 3 = 4Ω resistor?<br />

First find the current that flows from A to B:<br />

I AB = V AB<br />

= 12V<br />

R AB 7.5Ω = 1.6A<br />

The incoming current splits between the 30Ω resistor and the effective<br />

resistance R 123 :<br />

A<br />

I AB<br />

I 4<br />

I 123<br />

R = 30Ω<br />

4<br />

R = 10Ω<br />

123<br />

B<br />

We can easily compute the current through the 30Ω resistor, since the<br />

potential difference across it is V AB :<br />

I 4 = V AB<br />

= 12V<br />

R 4 30Ω = 0.4A<br />

Using Kirchoff’s junction rule:<br />

I 123 = I AB − I 4 = 1.6A − 0.4A = 1.2A.


74 Circuits 3.10<br />

Because the R 3 = 4Ω resistor in connected in series with the parallel<br />

combination of R 1 and R 2 , the current through it is I 123 :<br />

−→ I 3 = 1.2A<br />

§ 3.10 Homework<br />

⊲ Problem 3.8<br />

In the Bohr model of the hydrogen atom, an electron in the lowest<br />

energy state follows a circular path, 5.29 × 10 −11 m from the proton.<br />

Show that the speed of the electron is 2.19×10 6 m s<br />

. What is the effective<br />

current associated with this orbiting electron?<br />

⊲ Problem 3.9<br />

In a particular cathode ray tube, the measured beam current is 20µA.<br />

How many electrons strike the tube screen every 1 30 seconds?<br />

⊲ Problem 3.10<br />

The quantity of charge q (in coulombs) passing through a surface of<br />

area 2.0cm 2 varies with time as q = 4t 3 + 5t + 6 where t is in seconds.<br />

What is the instantaneous current through the surface at t = 1.0s ?<br />

What is the value of the current density?<br />

⊲ Problem 3.11<br />

An electric current is given by I(t) = 100.0 sin(120πt), where I is in<br />

amperes and t is in seconds. What is the total charge carried by the<br />

current from t = 0 to t = 1/240s ?<br />

⊲ Problem 3.12<br />

Calculate the average drift speed of electrons traveling through a copper<br />

wire with a cross-sectional area of 1.00mm 2 when carrying a current<br />

of 1.00A. It is known that about one electron per atom of copper<br />

contributes to the current. The atomic weight of copper is 63.54 and<br />

its density is 8.92g/cm 3 .<br />

⊲ Problem 3.13<br />

Eighteen gauge wire has a diameter of 1.024mm. Calculate the resistance<br />

of 15.0m of 18-gauge copper wire at 20.0 ◦ C.<br />

⊲ Problem 3.14<br />

Suppose that a voltage surge produces 140V for a moment. By what<br />

percentatge will the ouput of a 120V, 100W lightbulb increase, assuming<br />

its resistance does not change?<br />

⊲ Problem 3.15<br />

<strong>Two</strong> cylindrical copper wires have the same mass. Wire A is twice as<br />

long as wire B. What is the ratio of their resistances?


3.10 Homework 75<br />

⊲ Problem 3.16<br />

Batteries are rated in ampere hours (A · hr), where a battery rated at<br />

1.0A · hr can produce a current of 1.0A for 1.0hr.<br />

(a) What is the total energy stored in a 12.0V battery rated at 55.0A·hr<br />

?<br />

(b) At $0.12 per kilowatt hour, what is the value of the electrical energy<br />

stored in this battery?<br />

⊲ Problem 3.17<br />

What is the required resistance of an immersion heater that will increase<br />

the temperature of a 1.5 kg of water from 10 ◦ C to 50 ◦ C in 10<br />

min while operating at 110V?<br />

⊲ Problem 3.18<br />

A battery with an emf of 12V and internal resistance of 0.90Ω is connected<br />

to a load resistor R.<br />

(a) If the current in the circuit is 1.4A, what is the value of R?<br />

(b) What power is dissipated in the internal resistance of the battery?<br />

⊲ Problem 3.19<br />

(a) Find the equivalent resistance between points a and b in the figure<br />

below.<br />

(b) If a potential difference of 34V is applied between points a and b,<br />

calculate the current in each resistor.<br />

7 Ω<br />

a<br />

4 Ω<br />

9 Ω<br />

b<br />

10 Ω<br />

⊲ Problem 3.20<br />

For the figure below find the current in the 20Ω resistor and the potential<br />

difference between points a and b.<br />

25 V<br />

10 Ω - +<br />

a 10 Ω b<br />

5.0 Ω 20 Ω<br />

5.0 Ω<br />

⊲ Problem 3.21<br />

Determine the equivalent capacitance for the capacitor network shown<br />

below. If the network is connected to a 12V battery, calculate the<br />

potential difference across each capacitor and the charge on each capacitor.


76 Circuits 3.10<br />

3.0 µF 6.0 µF<br />

2.0 µF<br />

⊲ Problem 3.22<br />

Four capacitors are connected as shown. Find the equivalent capacitance<br />

between points a and b. Calculate the charge on each capacitor<br />

in V ab = 15V.<br />

15 µF 3.0 µF<br />

20 µF<br />

6.0 µF<br />

⊲ Problem 3.23<br />

When two capacitors are connected in parallel, the equivalent capacitance<br />

is 4.00µF. If the same capacitors are reconnected in series, the<br />

equivalent capacitance is one-fourth the capacitance of one of the two<br />

capacitors. Determine the two capacitances.<br />

⊲ Problem 3.24<br />

For the system of capacitors shown below find the equivalent capacitance<br />

of the system, the potential across each capacitor, the charge on<br />

each capacitor, and the total energy stored by the group.<br />

3 µF 6 µF<br />

2 µF 4 µF<br />

90 V<br />

⊲ Problem 3.25<br />

Calculate the equivalent capacitance between the two points shown<br />

in the circuit below. Note that this is not a simple series or parallel<br />

combination.


3.10 Homework 77<br />

4 µF<br />

+ -<br />

2 µF<br />

+<br />

-<br />

8 µF<br />

+<br />

-<br />

+ -<br />

+<br />

-<br />

4 µF<br />

2 µF<br />

⊲ Problem 3.26<br />

If R = 1.0kΩ and E = 250V determine the direction and magnitude of<br />

the current in the horizontal wire between a and e.<br />

R c<br />

b<br />

2R d<br />

ε + -<br />

4R<br />

3R<br />

+<br />

-<br />

2ε<br />

a<br />

⊲ Problem 3.27<br />

Determine the current in each branch of the figure.<br />

3.0 Ω<br />

e<br />

5.0 Ω<br />

8.0 Ω<br />

1.0 Ω<br />

1.0 Ω<br />

4 V<br />

12 V<br />

⊲ Problem 3.28<br />

A 25-W light bulb is connected in series with a 100-W light bulb and<br />

a voltage V is placed across the combination. Which bulb is brighter?<br />

Explain.<br />

⊲ Problem 3.29<br />

An electric heater is rated at 1500W, a toaster at 750W, and an electric<br />

grill at 1000W. The three appliances are connected to a common 120V<br />

circuit. How much current does each draw? Is a 25A circuit sufficient<br />

in this situation?<br />

⊲ Problem 3.30<br />

An 8-foot extension cord has two 18-gauge copper wires, each having<br />

a diamter of 1.024mm. How much power does this cord dissipate when<br />

carrying a current of 1.0A? How much power does this cord dissipate<br />

when carrying a current of 10A?


78 Circuits 3.10<br />

⊲ Problem 3.31<br />

Because aluminum has a greater resistivity than copper, aluminum<br />

wires heat up more than copper wires when they carry the same currents.<br />

For this reason aluminum wire of the same gauge (diameter) is<br />

rated to carry a smaller current. What current in an aluminum wire<br />

will heat up the wire the same amount as a copper wire of the same<br />

gauge carrying 20 Amps?<br />

⊲ Problem 3.32<br />

Consider the following circuit.<br />

12 kΩ<br />

9.0 V<br />

R 2 = 15 kΩ<br />

10 µF<br />

3 kΩ<br />

The switch is closed and the capacitor is allowed to charge up.<br />

(a) How much charge will there be on the capactor when it is fully<br />

charged?<br />

(b) Now the switch is opened and the charge on the capacitor drains<br />

off. How long will it take for the capacitor to reach 1/5 of the charge<br />

it had at the moment the switch was opened?


3.11 Summary 79<br />

§ 3.11 Summary<br />

Definitions<br />

Electric Current:<br />

Current Density<br />

I = dq<br />

dt<br />

J = I A<br />

Facts<br />

Ohm’s Law: For many materials current density is proportional to<br />

the electric field.<br />

⃗J = σ ⃗ E<br />

with σ the conductivity of the material. ρ = 1/σ is called the resistivity.<br />

∆V = IR<br />

with R the resistance of the device.<br />

Theorems<br />

Electric Power:<br />

Kirchhoff’s Loop Rule:<br />

P = I∆V<br />

∑<br />

∆V = 0<br />

Kierchhoff’s Junction Rule:<br />

∑<br />

Iin = ∑ I out<br />

Resistors in Parallel:<br />

Resistors in Series:<br />

1<br />

R eff<br />

= 1 R 1<br />

+ 1 R 2<br />

Capacitors in Parallel:<br />

R eff = R 1 + R 2<br />

Capacitors in Series:<br />

C eff = C 1 + C 2<br />

1<br />

C eff<br />

= 1 C 1<br />

+ 1 C 2


80 Magnetic Fields 4.11


4.2 Magnetic Force on a Current 81<br />

4 Magnetic Fields<br />

§ 4.1 Magnetic Field<br />

We have all played with magnets at some point. Magnets will<br />

attract some types of metals and can attract and repel other magnets.<br />

This seems similar to electric forces. Magnetic forces can indeed be<br />

explained in terms of magnetic fields, but the connection between the<br />

magnetic field and the magnetic force is significantly different from<br />

that for electric fields and force. The magnetic field is similar to the<br />

electric field in that they are both vector fields. We use the symbol B ⃗ to<br />

represent the magnetic field. If we put a compass needle in a magnetic<br />

field, the field will turn the needle until it is aligned with the direction<br />

of the field. At this point we will use the following simple operational<br />

definition of the magnetic field. The direction of the magnetic field<br />

is the direction that a compass needle points. The magnitude of the<br />

magnetic field is related to how strong the force is that aligns the needle<br />

with the direction of the field.<br />

A magnetic field does apply a force to charged particles. The<br />

magnetic force on the particle has the following properties:<br />

• F ∝ q<br />

• F ∝ v<br />

• F ∝ B<br />

• F ⃗ is perpendicular to both ⃗v and B. ⃗ These can be combined into the<br />

following succinct formula for the force.<br />

Fact: Magnetic Force<br />

A particle with charge q and velocity ⃗v in a magnetic field ⃗ B will<br />

feel a force<br />

⃗F = q ⃗v × ⃗ B<br />

Notice that there is no force if the velocity is parallel to the magnetic<br />

field. Also notice that the magnetic force is zero on a stationary<br />

particle.


82 Magnetic Fields 4.2<br />

We can determine the dimensions of the magnetic<br />

field from the force equation:<br />

F = qvB −→ B = F qv<br />

The unit of magnetic field is the Tesla, abbreviated as<br />

just T.<br />

Newton<br />

Tesla =<br />

Coulomb · meter/second = Kilogram<br />

Coulomb · second<br />

§ 4.2 Magnetic Force on a Current<br />

If a current carrying wire is placed in a magnetic field it will experience<br />

a magnetic force. The current in the wire is composed of many<br />

moving charges. Each of these charges experiences a magnetic force.<br />

The force on the wire is the sum of the forces on all the moving charges<br />

in the wire.<br />

Theorem: Magnetic Force on a Current<br />

Suppose that you have a wire that is carrying a current I. A small<br />

section of wire of length ⃗ dl, where the vector points in the direction<br />

of the current, will experience a force<br />

⃗ dF = I ⃗ dl × ⃗ B<br />

The force on a longer section of wire can be found by integrating<br />

over the length of the section.<br />

∫<br />

⃗F = I dl ⃗ × B ⃗<br />

If the magnetic field is uniform over the region containing the wire<br />

then the following result can be proved.<br />

Theorem: Force on a Current in a Uniform Field<br />

Let ⃗ ∆l be a vector that points from the beginning to the end of a<br />

section of wire carrying a current I. If that section is in a uniform<br />

magnetic field, the force on that section is<br />

⃗F = I ⃗ ∆l × ⃗ B<br />

⊲ Problem 4.1<br />

Consider a semicircular piece of wire or radius R in the first two quadrants<br />

of the x-y plane. The wire carries of current I in the counterclockwise<br />

direction.


4.3 Trajectories Under Magnetic Forces 83<br />

y<br />

dl<br />

R<br />

dθ<br />

θ<br />

x<br />

There is a uniform magnetic field in the y direction, B ⃗ = Bĵ. We<br />

wish to compute the net force on this section of wire without using the<br />

theorem F ⃗ = I∆l ⃗ × B. ⃗<br />

(a) If we break the semicircle into small sections, they will be small<br />

sections of arc, as pictured in the diagram above. If we take one of<br />

these, it will be at a position θ, and will subtend an angle dθ. Show<br />

that dl ⃗ = (− sin θî + cos θĵ)Rdθ<br />

(b) With this result you can now compute the integral F ⃗ = ∫ I dl ⃗ × B. ⃗<br />

Show that the net force on the semicircle is −I2RBˆk.<br />

(c) Show that this is the same answer you get when you apply the<br />

theorem F ⃗ = I∆l ⃗ × B. ⃗<br />

⊲ Problem 4.2<br />

Consider the rectangular current loop pictured below.<br />

w<br />

I<br />

B<br />

B<br />

The field is uniform and in the direction indicated in the diagram.<br />

Show that the torque about the axis indicated by the dotted line is<br />

IAB where A is the area of the loop.<br />

§ 4.3 Trajectories Under Magnetic Forces<br />

Because the magnetic force is perpendicular to the velocity of the<br />

particle, the magnetic force can not do work on the particle. Suppose<br />

that a particle moves a small distance ⃗ dr. The work done by a force ⃗ F<br />

as the particle moves is<br />

dW = ⃗ F · ⃗dr<br />

But ⃗ dr = ⃗v dt so<br />

dW = ⃗ F · ⃗v dt<br />

h


84 Magnetic Fields 4.3<br />

For a magnetic force, ⃗v and ⃗ F are prependicular so that ⃗ F ·⃗v = 0. Thus<br />

dW = 0 for a magnetic force.<br />

Theorem: Work by Magnetic Force<br />

The magnetic force does zero work. Thus the magnetic force can<br />

change the direction but not the speed of a particle.<br />

Because the magnetic force changes only the direction of a particle,<br />

a magnetic field is useful for steering charged particles, once they are<br />

already moving.<br />

Consider a particle that is in a region with a uniform magnetic<br />

field. Suppose that the particles initial velocity is perpendicular to the<br />

magnetic field. Since the magnetic force is always perpendicular to<br />

the direction of the magnetic field, the force will have no component<br />

parallel to the field. So, since the particle started with zero velocity<br />

parallel to the field it will continue to have zero velocity parallel to the<br />

field. But this means that the velocity will always be perpendicular to<br />

the magnetic field, so |⃗v × B| ⃗ = vB. Thus we know that the magnitude<br />

of the magnetic force is<br />

F ≡ | ⃗ F | = q|⃗v × ⃗ B| = qvB<br />

In addition we know by the previous theorem that the speed of the<br />

particle will be constant, v = v 0 . So that the magnitude of the force<br />

is constant. In summary, we see that the magnitude of the magnetic<br />

force on the particle is constant and perpendicular to the velocity, so<br />

that the acceleration of the particle is constant and perpendicular to<br />

the velocity. We have run into this situation before: In circular motion<br />

the acceleration is constant and always perpendicular to the velocity.<br />

We are lead by this observation to the following theorem.<br />

Theorem: Circular Trajectories<br />

If a particle is in a region of uniform magnetic field and entered<br />

the region with a velocity perpendicular to the magnetic field, then<br />

the particle will execute circular motion while in the region.<br />

One can relate the radius and velocity of the motion to the field<br />

strength and charge by employing Newton’s second law.<br />

F = ma<br />

−→ qvB = m v2<br />

r<br />

⊲ Problem 4.3<br />

One can use the circular motion of a charge particle to determine it’s<br />

mass if you already know it’s charge. Suppose that you send a particle


4.4 Lorentz Force 85<br />

with a charge 1.6 × 10 −19 C into a field 0.11mT with a speed of 3.83 ×<br />

10 5 m s<br />

. The radius of the resulting motion is 2cm. What is the mass of<br />

the particle?<br />

⊲ Problem 4.4<br />

A stream of charged particles<br />

enter a circular region of uniform<br />

magnetic field as shown (gray). The<br />

particles fan-out in the region and<br />

each particle exits along one of the<br />

six trajectories A through F . Pick<br />

the trajectories for particles with the<br />

following properties:<br />

(a) Which particles are positively charged?<br />

(b) If all the particles have the same mass and charge, which have the<br />

highest speed?<br />

(c) If all the particles have the same speed and charge, which have the<br />

highest mass?<br />

(d) If all the particles have the same mass and speed, which have the<br />

highest charge?<br />

⊲ Problem 4.5<br />

A particle is moving in a circular trajectory because of a magnetic field.<br />

Show that regardless of the velocity of the particle, it will take the same<br />

amount of time to complete one revolution. The fact that the time is<br />

a constant eased the development of the cyclotron, an early particle<br />

accelerator.<br />

§ 4.4 Lorentz Force<br />

If there is a magnetic as well as electric field then both forces act<br />

on a charge particle at the same time.<br />

Definition: Lorentz Force<br />

The combined electric and magnetic forces on a charge particle is<br />

called the Lorentz Force.<br />

⃗F = q( ⃗ E + ⃗v × ⃗ B)<br />

A<br />

F<br />

E<br />

B<br />

D<br />

C<br />

⊲ Problem 4.6<br />

There is a region with a uniform magnetic field ⃗ B = Bˆk and electric<br />

field ⃗ E = Eĵ. Particles with charge q are sent into this region with a<br />

velocity ⃗v = vî.


86 Magnetic Fields 4.5<br />

(a) Show that if v = E/B that the particles will go straight through<br />

the region without deflection.<br />

(b) Show that if v > E/B and q > 0 then the particles will be deflected<br />

in the negative y direction.<br />

(c) Show that if v > E/B and q < 0 then the particles will be deflected<br />

in the positive y direction.<br />

(d) Show that if v < E/B and q > 0 then the particles will be deflected<br />

in the positive y direction.<br />

A device setup with crossed magnetic and electric fields as in the<br />

previous problem is called a velocity selector. Since it sorts out the<br />

particles based on their speeds, if you select out just the ones that<br />

go straight ahead, you have selected particles with a particular speed<br />

v = E/B. By adjusting the field strengths you can choose what velocity<br />

you would like to select.<br />

§ 4.5 Hall Effect<br />

Let us look with more detail at the flow of current in a wire that<br />

is in a magnetic field. Suppose that we have a rectangular conductor<br />

with a current I running through it.<br />

w<br />

h<br />

If we consider the charges in the wire we see that there will be a<br />

magnetic force on the particles that will tend to deflect them to one<br />

face of the conductor.<br />

I<br />

-<br />

I<br />

But this force will be acting on all the free charges, so they will all shift<br />

upward as they move through the conductor. Keeping in mind that<br />

the positive charge in the conductor does not move, we see that this<br />

shift of the (negative) free charges will build up a net negative charge<br />

on one face of the conductor and net positive charge on the opposing<br />

face.<br />

-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

I<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

I<br />

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+


4.5 Hall Effect 87<br />

But this charge separation will create an electric field, that is in the<br />

opposite direction to the magnetic force, thus the charge will continue<br />

to build up on the face of the conductor until the electric field builds<br />

up to the point where the electric force on the charges balances the<br />

magnetic force on the charges.<br />

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -<br />

I<br />

E E E E E<br />

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +<br />

This will happen any time that a current carrying wire is in a magnetic<br />

field: the wire will spontaneously generate an electric field across the<br />

wire (not end to end but across). This effect, discovered by Edwin<br />

Hall, is called the Hall Effect. Because there is an electric field across<br />

the conductor there will also be an electric potential difference (called<br />

the Hall voltage), ∆V = Ew where w is the width of the conductor.<br />

But we know that in order for the electric force to cancel the magnetic<br />

force, we need E = vB. So we see that<br />

∆V = vBw −→ v = ∆V<br />

Bw<br />

Because it is relatively easy to measure the electric potential difference,<br />

the width of the conductor and the magnetic field strength, this type<br />

of device can be used to measure the velocity of the charge carriers.<br />

Knowing the velocity allows one to determine how many charge carriers<br />

there are per volume. In a time dt a quantity of charge dq = I dt passes<br />

out the end of the wire, and a number of electrons dn = dq/e = I dt/e<br />

passes out of the wire. But we can also say that the charges have moved<br />

a distance dx = v dt in this time, so that a section of charge v dt long<br />

has passed out of the wire. Thus a volume of charge dV = hw v dt<br />

has passed out of the wire (where h is the thickness of the wire and hw<br />

is the cross sectional area of the wire). So the number of conduction<br />

electrons per volume (η) is<br />

η = dn<br />

dV = I dt/e<br />

hw v dt = I<br />

ehw v<br />

The carrier density, η, depends on the type of material, not on the<br />

geometry of the material or the amount of current flowing through the<br />

material.<br />

The Hall effect can be used to make a magnetic field sensor. By<br />

using the equation v = ∆V<br />

Bw<br />

to eliminate the velocity from the equation<br />

η =<br />

I<br />

ehw v<br />

, and then solving for B we find that<br />

B = eηh ∆V<br />

I .<br />

The e, η and h are all constants for a given device, while ∆V and I are<br />

I


88 Magnetic Fields 4.6<br />

both easily measured.<br />

The Hall effect also allows us to determine if the charge carriers<br />

are positive or negative. In the analysis above we assumed that the<br />

charge carriers were negatively charged electrons. Consider what would<br />

happen if the charge carriers were positive instead. The positive charges<br />

would also be deflected by the magnetic field.<br />

I<br />

+<br />

I<br />

Which will build up a field in the opposite direction.<br />

I<br />

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +<br />

E E E E E<br />

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -<br />

Thus we can determine from the sign of the Hall voltage, if the charge<br />

carriers are positive or negative. There are some types of semiconductors<br />

that have positive charge carriers, for example silicon with a little<br />

bit of aluminum mixed in. Semiconductors with positive charge carriers<br />

are called p-type semiconductors. Semiconductors with negative<br />

charge carriers are called n-type semiconductors.<br />

I<br />

§ 4.6 More Examples<br />

Example<br />

An electron is injected horizontally into a parallel plate capacitor with<br />

a velocity v = 4 × 10 6 m s : A, +Q<br />

-e<br />

v<br />

A, -Q<br />

The plates are square, with sides 20cm and the charge on the capacitor<br />

is 7.5µC. Describe what magnetic field is required such that the net<br />

force on the electron is zero between the capacitor plates. Ignore any<br />

edge effects.<br />

The electric field points down, since the top plate on the capacitor is<br />

positive. However, since the electron has a negative charge, the electric<br />

force is up. Thus, the force caused by the magnetic field must be down.<br />

Here is what the force diagram on the electron must look like


4.6 More Examples 89<br />

-e<br />

F E<br />

v<br />

F B<br />

= -e(v x B)<br />

Again, since the electron’s charge is negative, the magnetic force will<br />

point in the direction opposite the cross-product ⃗v × ⃗ B. So, ⃗ B must<br />

point into the page. The magnitude of B can be determined since the<br />

net force is to be zero:<br />

F B = F E<br />

−→ evB = eE<br />

Or, solving for B:<br />

B = E v<br />

For a parallel plate capacitor: E = σ/ɛ 0 , so<br />

B =<br />

σ Q<br />

ɛ 0 v = A<br />

ɛ 0 v<br />

7.5 × 10 −6 C<br />

−→ B =<br />

(0.2m) 2 (8.85 × 10 −12 C 2<br />

Nm<br />

)(4 × 10 6 m<br />

2 s ) = 5.3T<br />

So, ⃗ B must be perpendicular to the electric field, pointing into the page<br />

with a magnitude of 5.3T for the electon to have no net force on it.<br />

Example<br />

A proton is injected from a region with no magnetic field into a region<br />

with a strip of uniform magnetic field that is 10cm wide:<br />

+e<br />

v = ?<br />

L = 10cm<br />

B = 0.3T<br />

The magnetic field points into the page and has a magnitude of 0.3T.<br />

What is the maximum velocity the proton can have such that it does<br />

not make it across the 10cm magnetic-field region and exit through the<br />

other side?<br />

Upon entering the magnetic field, the proton will experience a force<br />

perpendicular the velocity, which will cause it to follow a circular path:


90 Magnetic Fields 4.6<br />

+e<br />

v = ?<br />

r<br />

L = 10cm<br />

B = 0.3T<br />

Let’s compute the radius of the path in terms of the velocity. Newton’s<br />

second law applied to the proton yields<br />

F B = m v2<br />

r<br />

evB = m v2<br />

r<br />

−→ r = mv<br />

eB<br />

So as v increases so does r. In order that the proton not exit through<br />

the other side of the magnetic field region we must have r < L;<br />

mv<br />

eB < L<br />

−→ v < eBL<br />

m<br />

= 2.9 × 106 m s<br />

Example<br />

A straight section of wire that is 0.5m long and carrying a current of<br />

I = 8A directed along the +x axis. One end of the wire is at the origin<br />

. The wire is in a magnetic field<br />

⃗B = ĵ<br />

(3 T m 2 )<br />

x 2 + ˆk<br />

What is the force on the wire?<br />

Look at a small section of the wire:<br />

y<br />

( )<br />

2 T x.<br />

m<br />

x<br />

dx<br />

x<br />

z


4.6 More Examples 91<br />

The force on this small section is:<br />

dF ⃗ = Id⃗x × B ⃗<br />

= (Idx)î ×<br />

( )<br />

ĵ<br />

(3 T m 2<br />

= (Idx)<br />

(ˆk(3x 2 ) − ĵ(2x)<br />

x 2 + ˆk<br />

(<br />

)<br />

2 T m<br />

) )<br />

x<br />

Integrate over the entire length of the wire to get the total force:<br />

0.5m ∫<br />

)<br />

⃗F = (Idx)<br />

(ˆk(3x 2 ) − ĵ(2x)<br />

0<br />

= I [ î(x 3 ) − ĵ(x 2 ) ] 0.5m<br />

0<br />

= (8A) [ (0.5) 3 î − (0.5) 2 ĵ ] [T · m]<br />

= (1N)î − (2N)ĵ<br />

Example<br />

An L-shaped section of wire, carryies a current I, and is in a constant<br />

magnetic field, as shown in the figure:<br />

L 1<br />

L 2<br />

I<br />

B<br />

In terms of the parameters shown, what is the direction and magnitude<br />

of the net magnetic force on the wire?<br />

Use the right hand rule to find the direction of the force on each segment:<br />

L 1<br />

L 2<br />

F 1<br />

F 2<br />

I<br />

B


92 Magnetic Fields 4.6<br />

The net force is<br />

⃗F = îF 1 − ĵF 2<br />

= îIL 1 B − ĵIL 2 B<br />

So the direction is given by<br />

( ) ( )<br />

θ = tan −1 IL2 B<br />

= tan −1 L2<br />

,<br />

IL 1 B<br />

L 1<br />

where θ is below the x-axis. The magnitude of the force is<br />

√<br />

F =<br />

√F1 2 + F 2 2 = IB L 2 1 + L2 2<br />

Example<br />

What is the net force on an a × b rectangular loop of wire carrying a<br />

current I that is in a uniform magnetic field perpendicular to the loop’s<br />

plane?<br />

Assume a direction for the magnetic field and use the right hand rule<br />

to draw the forces on each segment of the loop:<br />

a<br />

F 1<br />

b<br />

F 2<br />

F 3<br />

F 4<br />

B<br />

The net force on the loop is:<br />

⃗F = ⃗ F 1 + ⃗ F 2 + ⃗ F 3 + ⃗ F 4<br />

= î(F 2 − F 4 ) + ĵ(F 3 − F 1 )<br />

= î(IbB − IbB) + ĵ(IaB − IaB)<br />

= 0<br />

I<br />

Example<br />

Show that the magnetic force due to a uniform magnetic field for any<br />

closed current loop is zero.<br />

The force law states<br />

∮<br />

⃗F = I d ⃗ l × B ⃗


4.7 Homework 93<br />

Imagine the closed loop to be divided up into many d ⃗ l i , approximated<br />

by a many-sided polygon:<br />

B<br />

I<br />

So, the integral is just the limit of a sum over all of the small segments:<br />

∮<br />

d ⃗ l × ⃗ B = d ⃗ l 1 × ⃗ B + d ⃗ l 2 × ⃗ B + · · ·<br />

= (d ⃗ l 1 + d ⃗ l 2 + · · ·) × B ⃗ (∮ )<br />

= d ⃗ l × B ⃗<br />

⃗B is outside the integral because it is constant. The vector sum indicated<br />

by the integral in the last line must vanish since the vectors form<br />

a close polygon; graphical vector addition yields zero. Thus,<br />

∮<br />

⃗F = I d ⃗ l × B ⃗<br />

(∮ )<br />

= I d ⃗ l × B ⃗<br />

= 0<br />

§ 4.7 Homework<br />

⊲ Problem 4.7<br />

Consider an electron near the equator. In which direction does it tend<br />

to deflect by the magnetic field of the earth if its velocity is directed<br />

(a) downward, (b) northward, (c) westward, or (d) southeastward?<br />

⊲ Problem 4.8<br />

An electron moving along the positive x axis perpendicular to a magnetic<br />

field experiences a magnetic deflection in the negative y direction.<br />

What is the direction of the magnetic field?<br />

⊲ Problem 4.9<br />

An electron in a uniform electric and magnetic field has a velocity of<br />

1.2×10 4 m s in the positive x direction and an acceleration of 2.0×1012 m s 2


94 Magnetic Fields 4.7<br />

in the positive z direction. If the electric field has a strength of 20N/C<br />

in the positive z direction, what is the magnetic field in the region?<br />

⊲ Problem 4.10<br />

A duck flying due north at 15 m s<br />

passes over Atlanta, where the Earth’s<br />

magnetic field is 5.0 × 10 −5 T in a direction 60 ◦ below the horizontal<br />

line running north and south. If the duck has a net positive charge of<br />

0.040µC, what is the magnetic force acting on it?<br />

⊲ Problem 4.11<br />

A proton moves with a velocity of v = (2î − 4ĵ + ˆk) m s<br />

in a region in<br />

which the magnetic field is B ⃗ = (î + 2ĵ − 3ˆk)T. What is the magnitude<br />

of the magnetic force this charge experiences?<br />

⊲ Problem 4.12<br />

Show that the work done by the magnetic force on a charged particle<br />

moving in a magnetic field is zero for any displacement of the particle.<br />

⊲ Problem 4.13<br />

Below is shown a cube (40cm on each edge) in a magnetic field with a<br />

wire carrying a current I = 5.0A over the surface of the cube. If there<br />

is a magnetic field B ⃗ = 0.020Tĵ. What is the magnitude and direction<br />

of the magnetic force on each straight segment of the current loop?<br />

y<br />

B<br />

d<br />

a<br />

I<br />

z<br />

c<br />

b<br />

x<br />

⊲ Problem 4.14<br />

A singly charged positive ion has a mass of 3.20×10 −26 kg. After being<br />

accelerated through a potential difference of 833V, the ion enters a<br />

magnetic field of 0.920T along a direction perpendicular to the direction<br />

of the field. Calculate the radius of the path of the ion in the field.<br />

Find the velocity of the particle first then use the circular motion<br />

result.<br />

⊲ Problem 4.15<br />

A proton (charge +e, mass m p ), a deuteron (charge +e, mass 2m p ),<br />

and an alpha particle, (charge +2e, mass 4m p ) are accelerated through<br />

a common potential difference, V . The particles enter a uniform magnetic<br />

field B, in a direction perpendicular to B. The particles move in


4.7 Homework 95<br />

circular orbits. Write the radii of the orbits of the deuteron, r d , and<br />

the alpha particle, r α , in terms of the radius of the protons orbit r p .<br />

⊲ Problem 4.16<br />

Indicate the initial direction of the deflection of the charged particles<br />

as they enter the magnetic fields shown below.<br />

(a)<br />

(b)<br />

+ -<br />

(c)<br />

(d)<br />

+<br />

⊲ Problem 4.17<br />

A proton moves through a uniform electric field ⃗ E = 50ĵV/m and a<br />

uniform magnetic field ⃗ B = (0.20î + 0.30ĵ + 0.40ˆk)T. Determine the<br />

acceleration of the proton when it has a velocity ⃗v = 200î m s .<br />

+


96 Magnetic Fields 4.8<br />

§ 4.8 Summary<br />

Definitions<br />

Facts<br />

Force on a moving charge:<br />

⃗F = q⃗v × ⃗ B<br />

Force on a piece of wire carrying a current I:<br />

⃗ dF = I ⃗ dl × ⃗ B<br />

Theorems


5.1 Sources of Magnetic Field 97<br />

5 Sources of Magnetic Field<br />

§ 5.1 Sources of Magnetic Field<br />

So far we have not considered how magnetic fields are created. As<br />

you may know it is possible to create an electromagnet by wrapping<br />

a wire around a nail and running a current through the wire. The<br />

precise way in which a current produces a magnetic field is captured in<br />

the following law.<br />

Fact: Biot-Savart Law<br />

If you have a wire carrying a current I, a small section of the wire<br />

⃗dl will produce a magnetic field<br />

dB ⃗ = µ 0I ⃗dl × ˆr<br />

4π r 2<br />

where ⃗r is the vector that points from the location of the element<br />

⃗dl to the field point. The total field is the sum of the contributions<br />

of each element of the wire.<br />

This may look complicated but it represents the simple fact that<br />

the magnetic field wraps around the wire, and decreases in strength as<br />

you move away. In the figure below is depicted two magnetic field lines<br />

that are due to the current element ⃗ dl indicated.<br />

Note that the field warps around the extension of the current element<br />

in circles. This figure does not depict how the field strength changes<br />

with position. The direction the field wraps around the current is the<br />

same direction the fingers of your right hand will wrap around the wire<br />

if you grasp the wire with your thumb pointing in the direction of the<br />

current.


98 Sources of Magnetic Field 5.1<br />

In order to apply the Biot-Savart law one must first parameterize<br />

the curve that the wire follows. A parameterization for a curve is a<br />

vector function ⃗r(t) of one variable t, such that ⃗r(t) points from the<br />

origin to the curve and sweeps along the curve as the variable t is<br />

increased. Below is picture such a vector function at the values of t.<br />

The variable t is not the time, but it is sometimes helpful to think of<br />

it as the time, so that you can imagine ⃗r(t) is the position of some<br />

particle that is following the curve.<br />

As an example consider the following vector function of t.<br />

⃗r(t) = a cos tî + a sin tĵ<br />

This is a parameterization of a circle of radius a centered at the origin.<br />

There are other parameterizations of a circle. For example ⃗r(t) =<br />

a cos tî − a sin tĵ is also a parameterization of a circle, but as t increases<br />

the vector sweeps clockwise rather than counterclockwise.<br />

⊲ Problem 5.1<br />

For the parameterization of a circle ⃗r(t) = a cos tî + a sin tĵ, over what<br />

range would you need to vary t in order to have the vector sweep over<br />

the quarter circle in the second quadrant?<br />

Here are some other parameterizations.<br />

Straight Line :<br />

Helix :<br />

Spiral :<br />

Vertical Parabola :<br />

Horizontal Parabola :<br />

⃗r(t) = atî + btĵ + cˆk<br />

⃗r(t) = a cos tî + a sin tĵ + btˆk<br />

⃗r(t) = t cos tî + t sin tĵ<br />

⃗r(t) = ⃗a + btî + ct 2 ĵ<br />

⃗r(t) = ⃗a + bt 2 î + ctĵ


5.1 Sources of Magnetic Field 99<br />

⊲ Problem 5.2<br />

Write a parameterization for a parabola that goes through the three<br />

points (-1,0), (0,1) and (1,0).<br />

With the parameterization in hand we can proceed with a computation<br />

using the Biot-Savart law. First we notice that if we change t<br />

a little bit dt that the difference between ⃗r(t) and ⃗r(t + dt) is a short<br />

vector along the curve.<br />

So we see that the small section along the curve ⃗ dl that appears in the<br />

Biot-Savart law can be found from our parameterization. Further since<br />

we can write<br />

⃗dr = ⃗r(t + dt) − ⃗r(t) =<br />

⃗r(t + dt) − ⃗r(t) dr<br />

dt = ⃗ dt<br />

dt dt<br />

⃗dl = ⃗ dr<br />

dt dt<br />

This was the main point of the parameterization, now we can “add up”<br />

the contributions from all the section by integrating over the parameter<br />

t.<br />

We still need to do another step before we can write out the integral.<br />

We need to write out the vector that points from the current<br />

element ⃗ dl to the field point. So that we do not get the different vectors<br />

mixed up, let us call the vector that points from the origin to the field<br />

point ⃗r f , and let us call the parameterization of the current path ⃗r s (t).<br />

Then the vector that points from the current element to the field point<br />

can be written as<br />

⃗r = ⃗r f − ⃗r s (t)


100 Sources of Magnetic Field 5.1<br />

Now we can write out the Biot-Savart integral in terms of the<br />

parameterization.<br />

⃗B(r f ) = µ ∫<br />

0I ⃗dl × ˆr<br />

4π r 2<br />

= µ ∫<br />

0I ⃗dl × ⃗r<br />

4π r 3<br />

= µ ∫ drs ⃗<br />

0I<br />

dt<br />

× [⃗r f − ⃗r s (t)]<br />

4π |⃗r f − ⃗r s (t)| 3 dt<br />

This gives us a system by which we can find the field at any point due<br />

to any current that we can parameterize. Of course it is very rare that<br />

the integral has an analytic solution, but one can use a computer to<br />

evaluate the integral numerically once you have used this system to<br />

write out the integral.<br />

In order to see exactly what all this means let us do an example.<br />

Example<br />

Suppose that we have a current of 15 amps going through a section of<br />

wire that follows the curve below, which has the following parameterization.<br />

⃗r s (t) = (−t + t 3 )î + t 2 ĵ<br />

Where the distance is in meters, and t goes from -0.9 to 0.9.<br />

We want to find the field at the point ⃗r f = 0î + 1ĵ. In preparation for<br />

plugging into the Biot-Savart law we compute the following quantities.<br />

⃗r f − ⃗r s (t) = (t − t 3 )î + (1 − t 2 )ĵ = (1 − t 2 )(tî + 1ĵ)<br />

|⃗r f − ⃗r s (t)| 2 = (1 − t 2 ) 2 (t 2 + 1)<br />

|⃗r f − ⃗r s (t)| 3 = (1 − t 2 ) 3 (t 2 + 1) 3/2<br />

and<br />

⃗ dr s<br />

dt = (−1 + 3t2 )î + 2tĵ


5.2 Ampere’s Law 101<br />

and<br />

⃗ dr s<br />

dt × [⃗r f − ⃗r s (t)] = [ (−1 + 3t 2 )î + 2tĵ ] × [ (1 − t 2 )(tî + 1ĵ) ]<br />

= (1 − t 2 ) [ (−1 + 3t 2 )î + 2tĵ ] × [(tî + 1ĵ)]<br />

= (1 − t 2 ) [ (−1 + 3t 2 ) − 2t 2] ˆk<br />

= −(1 − t 2 ) 2ˆk<br />

Now putting this into the parameterized form of the Biot-Savart law<br />

we find:<br />

⃗B(⃗r f ) = µ 0I<br />

4π<br />

= µ 0I<br />

4π<br />

∫<br />

⃗ drs<br />

dt<br />

∫ 0.9<br />

= − µ 0I<br />

4π ˆk<br />

−0.9<br />

∫ 0.9<br />

× [⃗r f − ⃗r s (t)]<br />

|⃗r f − ⃗r s (t)| 3 dt<br />

−(1 − t 2 ) 2ˆk<br />

(1 − t 2 ) 3 (t 2 + 1)<br />

−0.9<br />

= − µ 0I<br />

4π ˆk [1.9367m −1 ]<br />

= −(2.90mT)ˆk<br />

3/2<br />

dt<br />

1<br />

dt<br />

(1 − t 2 )(t 2 + 1)<br />

3/2<br />

⊲ Problem 5.3<br />

Consider a straight section of wire along the x-axis that goes from x = a<br />

to the x = b. The wire carries a current I. What is the magnetic field<br />

at the position ⃗r f = yĵ.<br />

⊲ Problem 5.4<br />

A circular section of wire is carrying a current I counterclockwise. The<br />

arc of the wire subtends an angle of θ. The circle has a radius a. What<br />

is the magnetic field due to this section of wire at the center of the<br />

circle?<br />

!<br />

§ 5.2 Ampere’s Law<br />

In addition to the Biot-Savart law, there is another way of stating<br />

the relationship between a current and the magnetic field it produces.


102 Sources of Magnetic Field 5.2<br />

Fact: Ampere’s Law<br />

For any closed curve the line integral of the magnetic field around<br />

the curve is equal to the µ 0 times the net current through the<br />

surface enclosed by the curve.<br />

∮<br />

∫<br />

⃗B · ⃗dl = µ 0 I through = µ 0<br />

⃗J · dA ⃗<br />

Example<br />

It is not at all apparent that Ampere’s law is equivalent to the Biot-<br />

Savart law, but it is. One can prove the Biot-Savart law from Ampere’s<br />

Law and visa versa. While they are mathematically equivalent, they<br />

are useful in different situations. Ampere’s law is useful for abstract<br />

reasoning about fields, and for finding the field strength in highly symmetric<br />

configurations.<br />

It is important when applying Ampere’s law to keep in mind that<br />

the amperian loop does not correspond to anything physical. There<br />

does not need to be anything there in order for the law to work. You<br />

are free to choose the amperian loop to be any shape you like. Of<br />

course, as was the case with applying Gauss’s law, if you want to use<br />

the law to find the field strength you need to pick the loop correctly.<br />

In order to use Ampere’s Law to find the field strength, you need three<br />

things from the loop.<br />

• The loop must pass through the point at which you want to find the<br />

field strength and be parallel to the field at that point.<br />

• The loop must be either parallel or perpendicular to the field at all<br />

points on the loop.<br />

• In all regions where the loop is parallel to the field, the field must<br />

have the same strength.<br />

Ampere’s law can be used to find the field strength a distance r from<br />

a long straight wire. We will take our loop to be a circle that wraps<br />

around the wire and has a radius r.


5.2 Ampere’s Law 103<br />

This satisfies all three of the above requirements.<br />

parallel to the field at all points on the loop,<br />

⃗B · ⃗dl = Bdl<br />

and since B has the same value at all points on the loop,<br />

∫ ∫<br />

Bdl = B dl = B2πr<br />

But by Ampere’s Law this must also be equal to µ 0 I. Thus<br />

B2πr = µ 0 I −→ B = µ 0I<br />

2πr<br />

Since the loop is<br />

Example<br />

In the previous example we found the magnetic field outside of a long<br />

wire. Now let us find the magnetic field that is inside the wire itself.<br />

The method is much the same. We choose our loop to be a circle of<br />

radius r that wraps around the central axis of the wire, which we has<br />

a radius R. Since we want to find the field inside the wire we will be<br />

working with r < R. We still find the same results that B = µ0I<br />

2πr , but<br />

we must remember the current in this equation is the current that goes<br />

through our loop. This current is not the full current of the wire, since<br />

our loop does not enclose the entire wire. So we need to find the current<br />

through our loop of radius r. Let us assume that the current density<br />

in the wire is uniform. Then we can say that the total current in the<br />

wire is I = JπR 2 and the current through the loop is I through = Jπr 2 .<br />

Combining these two equations to eliminate J we find that<br />

So that<br />

B = µ 0I through<br />

2πr<br />

I through = r2<br />

R 2 I.<br />

= µ 0I r 2<br />

2πr R 2 = µ 0Ir<br />

2πR 2<br />

The following graph shows the magnetic field both inside and outside<br />

the conductor.


104 Sources of Magnetic Field 5.2<br />

Example<br />

In this example we will see how to deal with a current density that is<br />

not uniform. Suppose that we have a long wire with a current density<br />

that is greater at the center and drops off to zero at the edge: J(r) =<br />

3I<br />

πR<br />

(1 − r/R). We want to find the magnetic field and from Ampere’s<br />

2<br />

law we find B = µ0I through<br />

2πr<br />

. The difficulty is that since J is not uniform<br />

we cannot use I = JA to find I through . We need to use dI = JdA to<br />

find I through = ∫ JdA. This example will show how to do that.<br />

We need to pick the area elements<br />

so that the current density is uniform<br />

over the entire surface of each element.<br />

Since the current density is a function<br />

of r only, J is constant in regions that<br />

are circles around the center. So we will<br />

use a circular element dA, as pictured in<br />

gray in the figure. The figure shows a<br />

cross section of the wire.<br />

R<br />

dA<br />

r+dr<br />

r<br />

In the limit that dr is very small the area will be simply the length<br />

around the circular area element, 2πr times the width of the element<br />

dr so that dA = 2πr dr. Now we can compute the current inside a loop<br />

of radius r loop by integrating.<br />

∫ rloop<br />

∫ rloop<br />

3I<br />

I through = J dA =<br />

(1 − r/R)2πr dr<br />

πR2 0<br />

= I r2<br />

R 2 (3 − 2 r R<br />

−→ B = µ 0I through<br />

2πr<br />

)<br />

0<br />

= µ 0Ir<br />

2πR 2 (3 − 2 r R<br />

)<br />

⊲ Problem 5.5<br />

Consider a long wire where the current density is not uniform but<br />

instead increases as you approach the center of the wire, so that at a


5.4 More Examples 105<br />

distance r from the center the current density is J(r) =<br />

I<br />

2πRr . Note<br />

that this is not a very realistic current density but it is easy to work<br />

with. Find the magnetic field strength both inside and outside of this<br />

wire.<br />

§ 5.3 Force Between Parallel Wires<br />

Now that we know that the strength of the magnetic field produced<br />

by a long straight current carrying wire we can find the force between<br />

two parallel wires.<br />

In the figure above the field produced by current B in the region of<br />

current A is shown. Using the right hand rule we can see that the<br />

direction of the force on wire A is toward wire B. We can also see that<br />

the field and the current are perpendicular so that the magnitude of<br />

the force on a length L of wire A is<br />

F = I A LB = I A L µ 0I B<br />

2πd = µ 0I A I B L<br />

2πd<br />

where d is the distance between the wires.<br />

Theorem: Force Currents<br />

<strong>Two</strong> long parallel wires have a force per length between them of<br />

F<br />

L = µ 0I A I B<br />

2πd<br />

where d is the distance between the currents.<br />

⊲ Problem 5.6<br />

An electrical cable carries 45 amps in each of two wires that are a<br />

distance of 4mm apart. The currents are in opposites directions.<br />

(a) Is the force between the wires attractive or repulsive?<br />

(b) What is the force per length between the wires?<br />

§ 5.4 More Examples


106 Sources of Magnetic Field 5.4<br />

Example<br />

Finite Wire<br />

A straight wire of length a carries a current I. What is the magnetic<br />

field caused by the current at a point (x, y) measured from the center<br />

of the wire?<br />

What is B here?<br />

x<br />

y<br />

The wire is a straight line, which can be parametrized:<br />

⃗r s = (at)î,<br />

where t varies from − 1 2 to + 1 2<br />

. So we have:<br />

d⃗r s<br />

dt = aî<br />

We want to find the magnetic field at the position<br />

⃗r f = xî + yĵ,<br />

Collect the quantities needed for applying the Biot-Savart law:<br />

⃗r f − ⃗r s = (x − at)î + yĵ<br />

Using the Biot-Savart law:<br />

| ⃗r f − ⃗r s | = √ (x − at) 2 + y 2<br />

d⃗r s<br />

dt × (⃗r f − ⃗r s ) = (aî) × ((x − at)î + yĵ)<br />

⃗B(x, y) = µ 0I<br />

4π<br />

= µ 0I<br />

4π<br />

= ayˆk<br />

∫<br />

1<br />

∫2<br />

− 1 2<br />

= − µ 0Iy<br />

4π<br />

d⃗rs<br />

dt × [⃗r f − ⃗r s ]<br />

| ⃗r f − ⃗r s | 3 dt<br />

ayˆk<br />

dt<br />

((x − at) 2 + y 2 ) 3 2<br />

x−<br />

∫<br />

a 2<br />

x+ a 2<br />

du<br />

(u 2 + y 2 ) 3 2<br />

where I have substituted u = x − at into the last expression. Looking<br />

ˆk


5.4 More Examples 107<br />

up the integral:<br />

[<br />

] x+ a<br />

⃗B(x, y) = µ 2<br />

0Iy u<br />

4π y 2√ ˆk<br />

u 2 + y 2 x− a 2<br />

⎛<br />

⎞<br />

= µ 0I x +<br />

⎝<br />

a 2<br />

x − a 2<br />

√<br />

4πy (x )<br />

− √ ⎠<br />

+<br />

a 2 (x )<br />

ˆk<br />

2 + y<br />

2 −<br />

a 2<br />

2 + y<br />

2<br />

The resulting expression gives the magnetic field anywhere in the plane<br />

we’ve chosen as the xy-plane. What about points that lie out of this<br />

plane? Let’s rotate our diagram:<br />

Looking from the side<br />

Looking down the wire<br />

B points out<br />

(x, y)<br />

B<br />

(x, y)<br />

I<br />

I<br />

I points out<br />

Now imagine rotating the xy plane around the wire. Since the distances<br />

x and y remain the same, only the direction of ˆk will change. The<br />

following diagram shows how the position of the magnetic field will<br />

change for different points, that are equidistant from the line:<br />

I<br />

The magnetic field “rotates” around the wire. A quick method to<br />

determine which direction the rotation of the field goes is to use a<br />

modified right-hand rule: Stick your right thumb in the direction of<br />

the current and your fingers will point in the direction of the field’s<br />

rotation.<br />

Example<br />

Using Ampere’s Law we found that the magnetic field strength at a


108 Sources of Magnetic Field 5.4<br />

distance r from an infinite wire was µ0I<br />

2πy<br />

. Let us take the limit of a → ∞<br />

of the results we have for the finite wire, and see if we get the same<br />

results.<br />

⎛<br />

⎞<br />

µ 0 I x +<br />

B = lim ⎝<br />

a 2<br />

x − a 2<br />

√<br />

a→∞ 4πy (x )<br />

− √ ⎠<br />

+<br />

a 2<br />

2 + y<br />

2 (x −<br />

a<br />

2 )2 + y 2<br />

(<br />

= µ a<br />

0I<br />

2<br />

√<br />

4πy (<br />

a<br />

− − a 2<br />

√<br />

2 )2 (−<br />

a<br />

2 )2 )<br />

= µ 0I<br />

2πy<br />

OK<br />

Example<br />

A circular wire with radius a carryies a current I. Locate the circle<br />

in the xy-plane and compute the magnetic field it causes along a line<br />

through its center.<br />

Here is the geometry of the loop:<br />

z<br />

r f<br />

r s<br />

The path along the circle can be parameterized using t = [0, 2π]:<br />

We also have<br />

dl<br />

⃗r s = a cos t î + a sin t ĵ<br />

dr ⃗ s<br />

= −a sin t î + a cos t ĵ<br />

dt<br />

⃗r f = z ˆk<br />

⃗r f − ⃗r s = −a cos t î − a sin t ĵ + z ˆk<br />

√<br />

| ⃗r f − ⃗r s | = a 2 cos 2 t + a 2 sin 2 t + z 2<br />

= √ a 2 + z 2<br />

Compute the cross product needed for the Biot-Savart law:<br />

⃗ dr s<br />

dt × (⃗r f − ⃗r s ) = (−a sin tî + a cos tĵ) × (−a cos tî − a sin tĵ + zˆk)<br />

= az cos tî + az sin tĵ + (a 2 sin 2 t + a 2 cos 2 t)ˆk<br />

= az cos tî + az sin tĵ + a 2ˆk


5.4 More Examples 109<br />

Use the Biot-Savart law:<br />

⃗B = µ ∫<br />

0I<br />

4π<br />

= µ 0I<br />

4π<br />

∫2π<br />

0<br />

⃗ drs<br />

dt × [⃗r f − ⃗r s ]<br />

| ⃗r f − ⃗r s | 3 dt<br />

az cos tî + az sin tĵ + a 2ˆk dt<br />

(a 2 + z 2 ) 3 2<br />

Since the integrals of the cosine and sine vanish for the interval [0, 2π],<br />

the resulting magnetic field is:<br />

µ 0 Ia<br />

⃗B 2 ∫2π<br />

=<br />

ˆk dt<br />

4π (a 2 + z 2 ) 3 2<br />

−→<br />

⃗ B = µ 0I<br />

2<br />

0<br />

a 2<br />

(a 2 + z 2 ) 3 2<br />

ˆk<br />

Example<br />

A semi-circular shaped wire with radius a carryies a current I. What<br />

is the magnetic field caused at the center of the semi-circle’s diameter?<br />

B = ?<br />

a<br />

Divide the wire into small sections and compute the magentic field<br />

contribution due to one small section:<br />

I<br />

dθ<br />

dB<br />

dl<br />

The direction for all sections is up, by the right hand rule. Use the<br />

Biot-Savart law for the magnitude:<br />

d ⃗ B = µ 0<br />

4π<br />

= Iµ 0<br />

4π<br />

Id ⃗ l × ⃗r ′<br />

ˆk<br />

r ′ 3<br />

(dl)(a)<br />

ˆk,<br />

a 3


110 Sources of Magnetic Field 5.4<br />

since d ⃗ l and the radius vector to the point are perpendicular. The<br />

length of dl can be approximated by the length of the arc subtended<br />

by the angle ∆θ, so<br />

|dB| ⃗ = Iµ 0 (adθ)(a)<br />

4π a 3 ,<br />

= Iµ 0 dθ<br />

4π a<br />

To find the magnetic field due to the entire wire, integrate:<br />

B = Iµ 0<br />

4π<br />

∫ π<br />

0<br />

dθ<br />

a = Iµ 0<br />

4a<br />

Example<br />

<strong>Two</strong> sections of straight wire carrying electric current lie parallel to<br />

each other, a distance b apart:<br />

I 2<br />

b<br />

a<br />

I 1<br />

The leftmost ends of the wires are aligned. What is the force that<br />

current I 1 exerts on current I 2 ? Draw a coordinate system:<br />

y<br />

dx'<br />

x'<br />

I 2<br />

b<br />

I 1<br />

x<br />

x=-<br />

a<br />

2<br />

The z-axis points out of the page. From a previous example, we know<br />

that the magnetic field due to I 1 in the xy-plane is<br />

⎛<br />

⎞<br />

⃗B 2 (x, y) = µ 0I 1 x +<br />

⎝<br />

a 2<br />

x − a 2<br />

√<br />

4πy (x )<br />

− √ ⎠ ˆk<br />

+<br />

a 2<br />

2 + y<br />

2 (x −<br />

a<br />

2 )2 + y 2


5.5 Homework 111<br />

The magnetic force on the small segment, dx ′ indicated for I 2 is<br />

dF ⃗ 21 = I 2 (dx ′ î) × B ⃗ 2 (x ′ , b)<br />

⎛<br />

⎞<br />

= µ 0I 1 I 2<br />

x<br />

(î × ˆk) ⎝<br />

′ + a 2<br />

x ′ − a 2<br />

√<br />

4πb<br />

(x′ )<br />

− √ ⎠<br />

+ a 2 (x′ )<br />

dx ′<br />

2 + b<br />

2<br />

− a 2<br />

2 + b<br />

2<br />

⎛<br />

⎞<br />

= µ 0I 1 I 2<br />

4πb<br />

(−ĵ) x<br />

⎝<br />

′ + a 2<br />

x ′ − a 2<br />

√ (x′ )<br />

− √ ⎠<br />

+ a 2 (x′ )<br />

dx ′<br />

2 + b<br />

2<br />

− a 2<br />

2 + b<br />

2<br />

To compute the total force on I 2 , integrate over the length of the wire:<br />

⎛<br />

⎞<br />

⃗F 21 = −ĵ µ ∫<br />

0I 1 I 0<br />

2 x<br />

⎝<br />

′ + a 2<br />

x ′ − a 2<br />

√<br />

4πb (x′ )<br />

− √ ⎠<br />

+ a 2 (x′ )<br />

dx ′<br />

2 + b<br />

2<br />

− a 2<br />

2 + b<br />

2<br />

−a<br />

2<br />

The integrals can be done using simple substitution, and yield:<br />

⃗F 21 = − µ 0I 1 I 2<br />

(√<br />

a2 + b<br />

4πb<br />

2 − b)<br />

ĵ<br />

What is the force exerted on I 1 by I 2 ? Newton’s third law gives us the<br />

answer:<br />

⃗F 12 = µ 0I 1 I 2<br />

(√<br />

a2 + b<br />

4πb<br />

2 − b)<br />

ĵ<br />

Notice that the two wires attract each other. What would happen if<br />

one of the current’s directions was reversed?<br />

They would repel each other<br />

§ 5.5 Homework<br />

⊲ Problem 5.7<br />

Calculate the magnitude of the magnetic field at a point 100 cm from<br />

a long, thin conductor carrying a current of 1.0 A.<br />

⊲ Problem 5.8<br />

A wire in which there is a current of 5.00 A is to be formed into a<br />

circular loop of one turn. If the required value of the magnetic field at<br />

the center of the loop is 10.0µT, what is the required radius?<br />

⊲ Problem 5.9<br />

In Neils Bohr’s 1913 model of the hydrogen atom, an electron circles<br />

the proton at a distance of 5.3 × 10 −11 m with a speed of 2.2 × 10 6 m s .<br />

Compute the magnetic field strength that this motion produces at the<br />

location of the proton.


112 Sources of Magnetic Field 5.5<br />

⊲ Problem 5.10<br />

Determine the magnetic field at a point P located a distance x from<br />

the corner of an infinitely long wire bent at a right angle, as shown.<br />

The wire carries a steady current I.<br />

I<br />

x<br />

P<br />

⊲ Problem 5.11<br />

Consider the current-carrying loop shown below, formed of radial lines<br />

and segments of circles whose centers are at point P . Find the magnitude<br />

and direction of ⃗ B at P .<br />

I<br />

b<br />

⊲ Problem 5.12<br />

<strong>Two</strong> long, parallel conductors separated by 10.0 cm carry currents in<br />

the same direction. If I 1 = 5.00A and I 2 = 8.00A, what is the force<br />

per unit length exerted on each conductor by the other?<br />

⊲ Problem 5.13<br />

Imagine a long cylindrical wire of radius R that has a current density<br />

J(r) = J 0 (1 − r 2 /R 2 ) for r ≤ R and J(r) = 0 for r > R, where r is the<br />

distance from a point of interest to the central axis running along the<br />

length of the wire.<br />

(a) Find the resulting magnetic field inside and outside the wire.<br />

(b) Plot the magnitude of the magnetic field as a function of r.<br />

(c) Find the location where the magnetic field strength is a maximum,<br />

and the value of the maximum field.<br />

⊲ Problem 5.14<br />

Below is shown a cross-sectional view of a coaxial cable. The center<br />

conductor is surrounded by a rubber layer, which is surrounded by<br />

an outer conductor, which is surrounded by another rubber layer. The<br />

current in the inner conductor is 1.00 A out of the page. The current in<br />

the outer conductor is 3.00 A into the page. Determine the magnitude<br />

and direction of the magnetic field at the points indicated at a distance<br />

1mm and 3mm from the center.<br />

a<br />

θ<br />

P


5.5 Homework 113<br />

3.00 A<br />

1.00 A<br />

1 mm 1 mm 1 mm<br />

⊲ Problem 5.15<br />

A long cylindrical conductor of radius R carries a current I. The current<br />

density J is not uniform over the cross-section of the conductor but is a<br />

function of the radius J = br, where b is a constant. find the magnetic<br />

field inside and outside the conductor.


114 Sources of Magnetic Field 5.6<br />

§ 5.6 Summary<br />

Definitions<br />

Facts<br />

Field due to a section of current:<br />

dB ⃗ = µ 0I ⃗dl × ˆr<br />

4π r 2<br />

Theorems<br />

Ampere’s Law:<br />

∮<br />

⃗B · ⃗dl = µ 0<br />

∫<br />

⃗J · ⃗ dA


6.2 Faraday’s Law 115<br />

6 Time Varying Fields<br />

§ 6.1 Introduction<br />

Let us take a moment to review what we know about the means<br />

of producing electric and magnetic fields. We have found two means to<br />

produce fields.<br />

• Electric fields are produced when there are regions in space with a<br />

net electric charge. This is encapsulated in Gauss’s law.<br />

∮<br />

⃗E · dA ⃗ = 1 ∫<br />

ρ dV<br />

ɛ 0<br />

• Magnetic fields are produced when there is a flow of charge. This is<br />

encapsulated in Ampere’s law.<br />

∮<br />

∫<br />

⃗B · ⃗dl = µ 0<br />

⃗J · dA ⃗<br />

So far, we have investigated only steady state fields (fields that don’t<br />

change in time). A net electric charge and a steady flow of charge are<br />

the only means to produce steady state electric and magnetic fields.<br />

But these are not the only means of producing time varying fields. In<br />

this chapter we will investigate time varying electromagnetic systems.<br />

§ 6.2 Faraday’s Law<br />

Let us start by considering what will happen if we have some source<br />

of time varying magnetic field. It could for example be a wire that is<br />

carrying a current and the current is changing rapidly in time. Since<br />

the current is changing in time, the magnetic field that the current<br />

creates will also change with time.<br />

If we place a loop of wire into this time varying<br />

magnetic field, the time varying field will produce<br />

a current in the wire. This is called an induced<br />

current. Nikola Tesla was able to produce such<br />

strong induced currents that he was able to make<br />

a light bulb glow with the current. In the photo<br />

to the right Tesla is holding a light bulb which<br />

has no wires connected to it. The current driving<br />

the bulb is entirely an induced current, which is<br />

caused by the time varying magnetic field.


116 Time Varying Fields 6.2<br />

The induced current is caused by an electric field. This induced<br />

electric field is not like the other electric fields we have seen. This is a<br />

new type of electric field. The electric field is created by the changing<br />

magnetic field.<br />

The electric field wraps around the changing<br />

magnetic field somewhat like a static magnetic field<br />

wraps around a steady current. There are some additional<br />

subtleties due to the fact that the induced<br />

electric field is caushed by the change in the magnetic<br />

field. The relationship between the induced electric<br />

field and the changing magnetic field is stated in the<br />

following law of physics.<br />

Fact: Faraday’s Law<br />

The line integral of the electric field around any closed curve is<br />

equal to negative the rate of change of the magnetic flux through<br />

any surface bounded by the curve.<br />

∮<br />

⃗E · ⃗dl = − d ∫<br />

dt<br />

⃗B · ⃗ dA<br />

Notice that this is very similar to Ampere’s Law:<br />

∮<br />

∫<br />

⃗B · ⃗dl = µ 0<br />

⃗J · dA ⃗<br />

Ampere’s Law and Faraday’s Law both relate the line integral around<br />

closed curve to the flux of a vector field through the area enclosed by<br />

the curve. The difference is that Faraday’s Law has the time derivative<br />

of the flux.<br />

Another important and potentially confusing thing to notice, is<br />

that the line integral of the electric field ( ∫ ⃗ E · ⃗ dl) has so far been<br />

referred to as the electric potential difference between the end points<br />

of the curve. The confusing thing is that since it is a closed curve the<br />

electric potential difference must be zero, ∆V = 0, while Faraday’s Law<br />

tells us that the line integral of the induced electric field is not zero, but<br />

equal to the rate of change of the magnetic flux. So we learn from this<br />

that the force caused by the induced electric field is not a conservative<br />

force field. We also see that there is no electric potential associated with<br />

this electric field, ( ⃗ E ≠ − ⃗ ∇V ). To avoid confusion we will refer to the<br />

line integral of the induced electric field by its historical name, the<br />

electromotive force, or EMF. In equations the EMF is represented by<br />

the symbol E, so that E = ∮ ⃗ E · ⃗ dl. Note that the unit of EMF is the<br />

volt.


6.2 Faraday’s Law 117<br />

Definition: Magnetic Flux<br />

The integral of the magnetic field over the area of the loop is called<br />

the magnetic flux.<br />

∫<br />

φ m = ⃗B · dA ⃗<br />

Note that this is of the same form as the definition of the electric<br />

flux (φ e = ∫ E ⃗ · dA), ⃗ in addition you may have noticed that current<br />

is the flux of current density, (I = ∫ J ⃗ · dA). ⃗ With the definition of<br />

magnetic flux and EMF we can rewrite Faraday’s Law in a simpler<br />

looking form.<br />

Theorem: Faraday’s Law (alternate form)<br />

The induced EMF in a loop is equal to the negative rate of change<br />

of the magnetic flux through the loop.<br />

E = − dφ m<br />

dt<br />

Example<br />

Suppose that we are in a region where the magnetic field is uniform<br />

and increasing with time:<br />

⃗B = ⃗ B 0 + atî + btĵ + ctˆk.<br />

We place a loop of wire with an area of A, so that it lies flat in the x-y<br />

plane. We want to compute the induced EMF in the loop. Since the<br />

loop is in the x-y plane we know that in computing the magnetic flux<br />

( ∫ B ⃗ · dA), ⃗ that the area elements will all be pointing in the z direction:<br />

dA ⃗ = ˆk dA. So ∫ ∫<br />

φ m = ⃗B · dA ⃗ = ( B ⃗ 0 + atî + btĵ + ctˆk) · ˆk dA<br />

∫<br />

∫<br />

= (B 0z + ct) dA = (B 0z + ct) dA = (B 0z + ct)A<br />

So we can compute the induced EMF in the loop.<br />

E = − dφ m<br />

dt<br />

= − d dt [(B 0z + ct)A] = −cA<br />

What can we learn from this example? First we learn that only the<br />

component of the magnetic field that is normal to the surface of the loop<br />

contributes to the magnetic flux. Second we see that no component<br />

of the constant part of the field, ⃗ B 0 , contributes to the induced EMF,<br />

only the time varying part of the field induces an EMF.


118 Time Varying Fields 6.2<br />

Example<br />

Consider now a field that is<br />

⃗B = B 0 cos ωt ˆk<br />

Again we take the loop in the x-y plane.<br />

Because the field is uniform we again get the result that the flux is the<br />

product of the normal component of the field and the area of the loop.<br />

And thus that<br />

φ m = B 0 A cos ωt<br />

E = − dφ m<br />

dt<br />

= B 0 Aω sin ωt<br />

The previous example will be very helpful in understanding the<br />

relationship between the direction of the magnetic field and the direction<br />

of the induced electric field. As we said before the induced electric<br />

field wraps around the magnetic field, but we did not say in which direction<br />

it wraps itself. The above example will help us understand the<br />

direction.<br />

First notice that in the figure above a positive magnetic field is<br />

one that is in the positive z direction, while a positive electric field is<br />

one that is counterclockwise. (This choice of positive directions is in<br />

compliance with another right hand rule, that we will express as Lenz’s<br />

law in just a moment.) Now examine the graph of the electric and<br />

magnetic fields. Sometimes the fields have the same sign and sometimes<br />

they do not. Let us analyze the the graph in four quarters. In the first<br />

quarter notice that the electric field is counterclockwise, the magnetic<br />

field is positive, and the magnitude of the magnetic field is decreasing.<br />

This is represented in symbols in the first row of the table below. The<br />

other three quarters follow.<br />

• First Quarter: E and B ↑ and |B| ↘.<br />

• Second Quarter: E and B ↓ and |B| ↗.


6.3 Maxwell’s Extension of Ampere’s Law 119<br />

• Third Quarter: E and B ↓ and |B| ↘.<br />

• Fourth Quarter: E and B ↑ and |B| ↗.<br />

Here are the same four quarters in diagrams:<br />

Notice that if the magnitude of the flux is decreasing, the fields have<br />

the same sign. While if the magnitude of the flux is increasing, the<br />

fields have opposite sign. This observation is usually stated in terms of<br />

the current that is caused by the induced electric field if a loop of wire<br />

is placed in line with the electric field loop.<br />

Fact: Lenz’s Law<br />

The induced current creates a magnetic field that opposes the<br />

change in the magnetic flux.<br />

⊲ Problem 6.1<br />

Check to see that Lenz’s law is obeyed in all four quarters in the previous<br />

example.<br />

§ 6.3 Maxwell’s Extension of Ampere’s Law<br />

We have seen that a changing magnetic field causes an electric field.<br />

It ends up that a changing electric field will also cause a magnetic field.<br />

∮<br />

∫<br />

⃗B · ⃗dl d<br />

= µ 0 ɛ 0<br />

⃗E · dA<br />

dt<br />

⃗<br />

This magnetic field is added to the magnetic field produced by currents<br />

so that we arrive at an extension of Ampere’s law that makes it<br />

applicable to time varying fields.<br />

Fact: Ampere’s Law - Time Varying<br />

∮<br />

∫<br />

∫<br />

⃗B · ⃗dl = µ 0<br />

⃗J · dA ⃗ d<br />

+ µ 0 ɛ 0<br />

dt<br />

= µ 0 I through + µ 0 ɛ 0<br />

dφ e<br />

dt<br />

⃗E · ⃗ dA


120 Time Varying Fields 6.4<br />

dφ<br />

The quantity ɛ e 0 dt<br />

is sometimes called the displacement current<br />

because it acts like a current in Ampere’s Law.<br />

⊲ Problem 6.2<br />

You have a parallel plate capacitor with circular plates. The capacitor is<br />

being charged so that the electric field between the plates is increasing<br />

at a constant rate: E = at, with a = 4.5 × 10 10 V · m −1 s −1 . Use<br />

the extended version of Ampere’s Law to find the magnetic field at<br />

a distance r = 4.0cm from the center of the capacitor and half way<br />

between the plates. Assume that the field is circular about the axis of<br />

the capacitor.<br />

§ 6.4 Inductance<br />

Suppose that you have a loop of wire in a region where there is no<br />

source of magnetic field. If you run a current through the wire there<br />

will now be a magnetic field due to the current. This magnetic field will<br />

create a magnetic flux through the loop. Because the field produced<br />

is proportional to the current, the flux will also be proportional to the<br />

current.<br />

φ m = LI<br />

The proportionality constant L is called the self inductance of the loop.<br />

The induced EMF on the loop is the product of the inductance and the<br />

rate of change of the current.<br />

E = L dI<br />

dt<br />

Circuit elements are manufactured with specific values of inductance,<br />

and are called inductors. The SI unit of inductance is called the Henry,<br />

abbreviated as H. Inductors are essentially a coil of wire, sometimes<br />

wrapped around a core of material designed to increase the inductance.<br />

The sign of E has been chosen in such a way as to facilitate the application<br />

if Kirchhoff’s loop rule to inductors. It is the same convention<br />

that was used for the resistor.<br />

+ ε –<br />

+ ΔV –<br />

I<br />

For an inductor Lenz’s law can be interpreted as “the induced EMF<br />

across an inductor is in such a direction as to oppose the change in the<br />

current through the inductor”. For example, suppose that a current<br />

is flowing through an inductor, if you now try and reduce the current,<br />

an EMF will be generated in the inductor that will tend to keep the<br />

current going. Similarly if you try to increase the current an EMF will<br />

be generated that will tend to stop the current from increasing.<br />

I


6.4 Inductance 121<br />

Example<br />

Suppose that you have the circuit shown.<br />

By some means you have established a current<br />

in the circuit (perhaps it is an induced current<br />

caused by some external magnetic field) such<br />

+ ε –<br />

that at t = 0 the current is I 0 . At t = 0 the<br />

external cause of the current disappears. What<br />

will happen to the current? – ΔV +<br />

I<br />

Since the inductor opposes the change in the current the current<br />

will not stop abruptly. Instead it will decrease gradually, the inductor<br />

will drive the circuit for a while. Note that this implies that an inductor<br />

can store energy, much like a capacitor can. Let us see how we would<br />

do the circuit analysis of this system.<br />

Kirchhoff’s Loop rule give us that<br />

E + ∆V = 0<br />

−→ L dI<br />

dt + IR = 0<br />

−→ dI<br />

dt = −R L I<br />

−→ I(t) = I 0 e − R L t<br />

Thus we see that the current will decay exponentially.<br />

I<br />

⊲ Problem 6.3<br />

The circuit below is assembled with the switch open. At the time t = 0<br />

the switch is closed.<br />

+ ε –<br />

V S<br />

+<br />

–<br />

I<br />

– ΔV<br />

+<br />

(a) What is the current as a function of time?<br />

(b) What is the EMF as a function of time?<br />

(c) What is the voltage on the resistor as a function of time?<br />

(d) Check to see if Kirchhoff’s loop rule is satisfied at all times.<br />

I


122 Time Varying Fields 6.6<br />

(e) Sketch the graphs of all three functions.<br />

§ 6.5 Alternating Current<br />

Often the currents in a circuit are sinusoidal.<br />

I(t) = I 0 cos ωt<br />

A circuit with such a current is referred to as an alternating current<br />

circuit, or AC circuit, because the current alternates directions in the<br />

circuit. In contrast a circuit with constant current is referred to as a<br />

direct current circuit, or DC circuit.<br />

§ 6.6 AC Power and RMS Voltage<br />

The electrical power supplied by the power company is sinusoidal.<br />

The electric potential between the two sockets of an electrical outlet is<br />

oscillating.<br />

V (t) = V 0 cos ωt<br />

The voltage supplied in the U.S. is said to be 120 volts. If you examine<br />

the underside of an electrical appliance there will be printed something<br />

like<br />

60Hz - 120V - 7.0AMPS<br />

someplace near the UL listing mark. As you may have guessed the first<br />

mark indicate that the appliance is designed to operate on AC power<br />

that has a frequency of 60Hz. You might expect that the amplitude of<br />

the supplied electric potential, V 0 , would be 120V, and the amplitude<br />

of the current drawn by the appliance, I 0 , would be 7.0AMPS. This<br />

is not quite correct. These numbers are not the amplitudes but the<br />

amplitudes divided by √ 2, so that the actual amplitudes are greater<br />

by a factor of √ 2 than these values marked on the appliance. Thus V 0 =<br />

(120V) √ 2 = 170V and I 0 = (7.0A) √ 2=9.9A. In order to understand<br />

why this is so we need to consider the power dissipated in the appliance.<br />

Recall that power is the product of the voltage and the current.<br />

Suppose for simplicity that the appliance that we are using is a toaster.<br />

This is simple because, as an electrical circuit, a toaster is simply a<br />

resistor. So our entire system, including the AC source, is diagramed<br />

as follows.


6.7 AC Circuit Elements 123<br />

+<br />

V S–<br />

R<br />

Because the current oscillates in time, the power dissipated in the resistor<br />

also oscillates in time.<br />

P (t) = I(t)V (t)<br />

= I(t)I(t)R<br />

= [I(t)] 2 R<br />

= [I 0 cos ωt] 2 R<br />

= I 2 0 R cos 2 ωt<br />

Notice that the power oscillates between zero and I 2 0 R so that the<br />

average power supplied to the toaster is 1 2 I2 0 R.<br />

P avg = I2 0 R<br />

= I 0 I<br />

√ 0 R √2 = I 0 V<br />

√ √ 0<br />

= (7.0A)(120V)<br />

2 2 2 2<br />

Notice that for a sinusoidal signal the root mean square (RMS) value is<br />

the amplitude divided by √ 2. Thus we can learn two things from this<br />

example. First, the values that are printed on the toaster are the RMS<br />

values. Second, the product of the RMS current and RMS voltage gives<br />

the average power. So in this example the average power consumed by<br />

the appliance is P = (7.0A)(120V) = 840W.<br />

⊲ Problem 6.4<br />

A 60 watt light bulb has an average power output of 60 watts.<br />

(a) What is the peak power?<br />

(b) What is the resistance of the bulb?<br />

(c) Is this resistance the same as the resistance that is required to<br />

dissipate 60 watts when connected to a 120 volt DC source?<br />

§ 6.7 AC Circuit Elements<br />

In many ways an AC circuit can be analyzed using the same techniques<br />

we used for DC circuits. In fact inductors and capacitors become<br />

as simple as resistors. In an AC circuit, inductors and capacitors<br />

follow an adapted Ohm’s Law: the amplitude of the voltage on the


124 Time Varying Fields 6.7<br />

element is proportional to the amplitude of the current through the<br />

element, V = ZI, just like a resistor. The proportionality constant Z<br />

is called the impedance.<br />

Let us see how this works for an inductor.<br />

Suppose that the current through an inductor is I(t) = I 0 cos ωt.<br />

Then we know that the EMF (V L ) on the inductor is<br />

V L = L dI<br />

dt = −ωLI 0 sin ωt<br />

So that the amplitude of the voltage oscillation is ωLI 0 .<br />

V L0 = ωLI 0 = Z L I 0 with Z L ≡ ωL<br />

So we see that the amplitudes of the voltage and current are proportional.<br />

The constant Z L = ωL is the equivalent of the resistance for an<br />

inductor.<br />

Theorem: Impedance: Inductor<br />

In an AC circuit the amplitude of the voltage on an inductor is<br />

proportional to the amplitude of the current flowing through the<br />

inductor.<br />

V L0 = Z L I 0 with Z L ≡ ωL<br />

The impedance of an inductor is Z L = ωL.<br />

The actual voltage and current are not proportional, since one is<br />

a sine function and the other is the cosine function.<br />

V L<br />

The voltage on an inductor reaches the peak value one quarter of a cycle<br />

before the current does. For this reason the voltage on an inductor in<br />

an AC circuit is said to lead the current by a phase of 90 ◦ .<br />

A capacitor is similar.<br />

V C = 1 C Q = 1 ∫<br />

Idt = 1<br />

C ωC I 0 sin ωt<br />

1<br />

So that the amplitude of the voltage oscillation is<br />

ωC I 0.<br />

V C0 = 1<br />

ωC I 0 = Z C I 0 with Z C ≡ 1<br />

ωC<br />

So we see that the amplitudes of the voltage and current are proportional.<br />

The constant Z C = 1<br />

ωC<br />

is the equivalent of the resistance for<br />

an capacitor.


6.8 Phasor Diagrams 125<br />

Theorem: Impedance: Capacitor<br />

In an AC circuit the amplitude of the voltage on a capacitor is<br />

proportional to the amplitude of the current flowing through the<br />

capacitor.<br />

V C0 = Z C I 0 with Z C ≡ 1<br />

ωC<br />

The impedance of an capacitor is Z C = 1<br />

ωC .<br />

The voltage on a capacitor reaches the peak value one quarter of a cycle<br />

after the current does. For this reason the voltage on a capacitor in an<br />

AC circuit is said to follow the current by a phase of 90 ◦ .<br />

§ 6.8 Phasor Diagrams<br />

This relationship between the leading and following phases is often<br />

represented in a phasor diagraph. As you may recall an oscillation can<br />

be thought of as the horizontal component of a circular motion. So we<br />

can represent the current or voltage in and AC circuit as the horizontal<br />

component of a circular motion.<br />

The current is represented as a vector with constant length I 0 that is<br />

rotating in the counter clockwise direction. The real physical current<br />

is the projection of this vector onto the horizontal (Re) axis.<br />

One thing that is very nice about the phasor representation is that<br />

it allows us to clearly represent in a diagram the phase relationship between<br />

different quantities. Let us take the leading phase of the inductor


126 Time Varying Fields 6.8<br />

voltage as an example. The fact that the inductor voltage is one quarter<br />

of a cycle ahead of the current, means that the inductor voltage<br />

phasor is 90 ◦ ahead of the current phasor.<br />

If you imagine the phasors rotating you can see that the projection of<br />

the voltage, onto the horizontal axis, will reach a peak one quarter of<br />

a cycle before the projection of the current reaches its peak.<br />

Here is the phasor diagram for a capacitor.<br />

At this point the phasor diagram has only allowed us to represent<br />

what we already know. The phasor diagram is far more useful. For<br />

example the phasor diagram will alow us to use Kirchhoffs loop rule<br />

for AC circuits, as we will see in the following example. The idea of a<br />

phasor is useful in many areas of physics and engineering. We will see<br />

more examples in the next chapter.<br />

Example<br />

Suppose that we have a capacitor and a resistor in series. What is the<br />

effective impedance of the combination. First imagine that we connect<br />

the combination to an AC source.<br />

+<br />

+<br />

V S–<br />

C<br />

R<br />

+<br />

V R<br />

–<br />

V C<br />


6.8 Phasor Diagrams 127<br />

What we want to find is the ratio of the amplitude of the supply voltage<br />

and the amplitude of the current: V S0 /I 0 .<br />

Kirchhoff’s loop rule gives us that<br />

V S (t) − V C (t) − V R (t) = 0 −→ V S (t) = V C (t) + V R (t)<br />

In the phasor diagram this implies that the sum of the phasors for V C<br />

and V R must be equal to the phasor of the source voltage V S . Since<br />

the resistor phasor is parallel to the current phasor we know that the<br />

phasors for V C must follow the phasor for V R by 90 ◦ . Thus the sum<br />

(also V S ) forms the hypotenuse of a right triangle.<br />

We can find the phasor for the sum of the voltage on the resistor and<br />

capacitor by adding the individual phasors like we add vectors. Also<br />

notice from the circuit diagram that the sum of the voltages on the<br />

resistor and capacitor is equal to the voltage on the supply: V S =<br />

V R + V C .<br />

Since the lengths of the phasors are the amplitudes of the voltages we<br />

can use the pythagorian theorem to find that<br />

V 2 S 0<br />

= V 2 R 0<br />

+ V 2 C 0<br />

= (RI 0 ) 2 + (Z C I 0 ) 2<br />

−→ V S 2 0<br />

I0<br />

2 = R 2 + ZC<br />

2 √<br />

−→ Z eff = V √<br />

S 0<br />

= R<br />

I 2 + ZC 2 = R 2 + 1<br />

0 (ωC) 2<br />

We see that the impedances do not simply add when the components<br />

are in series. In this case the square of the impedance was the sum of<br />

the squares of parts. This is not a general rule. We can also find the<br />

phase angle (φ) between the supply voltage and the current.<br />

tan φ = −V C 0<br />

= −Z CI 0<br />

= −Z C<br />

V R0 RI 0 R = −1<br />

ωRC<br />

There is a very significant difference between the resistance of a<br />

resistor and the impedance of a capacitor or inductor: the impedance<br />

depends on the frequency. In the previous example we see that the


128 Time Varying Fields 6.8<br />

effective impedance of the system depends on ω. This can be a useful<br />

property, since sometimes we wish to treat different frequencies differently.<br />

For example in an audio system, there are big speakers for<br />

low frequencies and small speakers for high frequencies, but the signal<br />

coming from the amplifier to the speakers contains both high and low<br />

frequencies. Let us see how we can use a capacitor and resistor is series<br />

to split the signal so that the appropriate signal goes to each speaker.<br />

Example<br />

For the circuit in the previous example, let us find the voltage on the<br />

capacitor and resistor relative to the voltage from the source.<br />

G R (ω) ≡ V R 0<br />

= V R 0<br />

/I 0 R<br />

= √<br />

V S0 V S0 /I 0 R2 + 1/(ωC) = 1<br />

√ 2 1 + 1/(ωRC)<br />

2<br />

G C (ω) ≡ V C 0<br />

= V C 0<br />

/I 0 1/ωC<br />

= √<br />

V S0 V S0 /I 0 R2 + 1/(ωC) = 1<br />

√ 2 (ωRC)2 + 1<br />

These ratios are called the gain.<br />

So we see that the voltage on the capacitor is equal the the source<br />

voltage at low frequencies and drops to zero at high frequencies, while<br />

the voltage on the resistor does just the reverse. So we see that the<br />

signal from the source is sorted by this circuit, high frequencies to the<br />

capacitor and low frequencies to the resistor. Thus we can send the<br />

voltage from the capacitor to the large speakers and the voltage from<br />

the resistor to the small speakers.<br />

⊲ Problem 6.5<br />

Suppose that you build a RL circuit instead of the RC, that is you<br />

replace the capacitor with an inductor in the previous example.<br />

(a) Find the gain for the resistor and inductor.<br />

(b) Graph the gain for the resistor and inductor.<br />

(c) Which will pass low frequencies better than high frequencies.


6.9 Homework 129<br />

⊲ Problem 6.6<br />

Show that this LRC circuit √ has a maximum<br />

current when ω =<br />

1<br />

LC<br />

. This is<br />

called the resonance frequency.<br />

L<br />

+<br />

V S<br />

–<br />

R<br />

C<br />

§ 6.9 Homework<br />

⊲ Problem 6.7<br />

Consider the hemispherical closed surface<br />

of radius R as shown . If the hemisphere<br />

is in a uniform magnetic field that makes an<br />

angle θ with the vertical, calculate the magnetic<br />

flux through the flat surface S 1 . Calculate<br />

the flux through the hemisphical surface<br />

S 2 .<br />

S 1<br />

S 2<br />

θ<br />

B<br />

⊲ Problem 6.8<br />

A powerful electromagnet has a field of 1.6T and a cross-sectional area<br />

of 0.20m 2 . If we place a coil having 200 turns and a total resistance<br />

of 20Ω around the electromagnet and then turn off the power to the<br />

electromagnet in 20ms, what is the current induced in the coil?<br />

⊲ Problem 6.9<br />

A rectangular loop of area A is placed in a region where the magnetic<br />

field is perpendicular to the plane of the loop. The magnitude of the<br />

field is allowed to vary in time according to B = B o e −t/τ . What is the<br />

induced emf as a function of time?<br />

⊲ Problem 6.10<br />

A long, straight wire carries a current<br />

I = I o sin(ωt+δ) and lies in the plane of a rectangular<br />

loop of N turns as shown. Determine<br />

the emf induced in the loop by the magnetic<br />

field of the wire.<br />

I<br />

a<br />

b<br />

c<br />

⊲ Problem 6.11


130 Time Varying Fields 6.9<br />

A magnetic field directed into the page changes<br />

with time according to B = at 2 + b. The field has<br />

a circular cross-section of radius R. What are the<br />

magnitude and direction of the electric field at a<br />

distance r from the center of the field.<br />

R<br />

⊲ Problem 6.12<br />

For the situation in the previous problem if B = (2.0t 3 − 4.0t 2 + 0.80)T<br />

and R = 2.5cm. Calculate the magnitude and direction of the force<br />

exerted on an electron located at a distance r = 2R from the center of<br />

the field at the time t = 2.0s.<br />

⊲ Problem 6.13<br />

A circular coil enclosing an area of 100cm 2 is made of 200 turns of<br />

copper wire. Initially a 1.10T uniform magnetic field points perpendicularly<br />

upward through the plane of the coil. The direction of the<br />

field then reverses. During the time the field is changing its direction,<br />

how much charge flows through the coil if the resistance of the coil is<br />

R = 5.0Ω.<br />

⊲ Problem 6.14<br />

The rotating loop in an ac generator is a square 10cm on a side. It<br />

is rotated at 60 Hz in a uniform field of 0.80T. Calculate (a) the flux<br />

through the loop as a function of time, (b) the emf induced in the loop,<br />

(c) the current induced in the loop for a loop resistance of 1.0Ω, (d) the<br />

power dissipated in the loop, and (e) the torque that must be exerted<br />

to rotate the loop.<br />

⊲ Problem 6.15<br />

A solenoid has n turns per unit length, radius a and carries a current<br />

I.<br />

Long Solenoid<br />

a<br />

a<br />

b<br />

c<br />

Large loop of wire<br />

Small loop of wire<br />

(a) A large circular loop of radius b > a and N turns encircles the<br />

solenoid at a point far away from from the ends of the solenoid. Find<br />

the magnetic flux through the loop.


6.9 Homework 131<br />

(b) A small circular loop of N turns and radius c < b is completely<br />

inside the solenoid, far from its ends, with its axis parallel to that of<br />

the solenoid. Find the magnetic flux through this small loop.<br />

⊲ Problem 6.16<br />

The two circular loops shown below have their planes parallel to each<br />

other.<br />

A<br />

B<br />

I<br />

As viewed from A toward B, there is a counter-clockwise current in loop<br />

A. Give the direction of the induced current in loop B and determine<br />

whether the loops attract or repel each other if the current in loop A<br />

is (a) increasing and (b) decreasing.<br />

⊲ Problem 6.17<br />

A bar magnet moves with constant velocity along the axis of a loop as<br />

shown in the figure below.<br />

B<br />

S<br />

N<br />

v 0<br />

(a) Make a qualitative graph of the flux φ B through the loop as a<br />

function of time. Indicate the time t 1 when the magnet is halfway<br />

throught the loop.<br />

(b) Sketch a graph of the current I in the loop versus time, choosing I<br />

to be positive when it is counterclockwise as viewed from the left.<br />

⊲ Problem 6.18<br />

Given the circuit below, assume that the switch S has been closed for<br />

a long time so that steady state currents exist in the circuit.<br />

S<br />

10 Ω<br />

10 V<br />

100 Ω 2 Η


132 Time Varying Fields 6.9<br />

Ignore any resistance of the inductor L. (a) Find the battery current,<br />

the current in the 100 Ω resistor, and the current through the inductor.<br />

(b) Find the intial voltage across the inductor when switch S is opened.<br />

(c) Give the current as a function of time measured from the instant<br />

of opening the switch S.<br />

⊲ Problem 6.19<br />

A 2.00H inductor carries a steady current of 0.500A. When the switch<br />

in the circuit is thrown open, the current disappears in 10ms. What is<br />

the average induced emf in the inductor during this time?<br />

⊲ Problem 6.20<br />

A coiled telephone cord has 70 turns, a cross sectional diameter of 1.3<br />

cm, and an unstretched length of 60 cm. Determine an approximate<br />

value for the self inductance of the unstretched cord.<br />

⊲ Problem 6.21<br />

A 10.0mH inductor carries a current I = I max sin ωt, with I max = 5.00A<br />

and ω/2π = 60.0Hz. What is the back emf as a function of time?<br />

⊲ Problem 6.22<br />

The switch in the circuit below is closed at time t = 0. Find the current<br />

in the inductor and the current through the switch as functions of time<br />

if V = 10.0V, R = 4.00Ω and L = 1.00H.<br />

R 2R<br />

V<br />

R<br />

L<br />

S<br />

⊲ Problem 6.23<br />

Show that I = I 0 e −t/τ is a solution of the differential equation<br />

IR + L dI<br />

dt = 0<br />

where τ = L/R and I 0 is the current at t = 0.<br />

⊲ Problem 6.24<br />

An air-coil solenoid with 68 turns is 8.0 cm long and has a diameter of<br />

1.2 cm. How much energy is stored in its magnetic field when it carries<br />

a current of 0.77A.<br />

⊲ Problem 6.25<br />

The switch in the circuit below is connected to point a for a long time.<br />

After the switch is thrown to point b find (a) the frequency of oscillation<br />

in the LC circuit, (b) the maximum charge on the capacitor, (c) the


6.9 Homework 133<br />

maximum current in the inductor, and (d) the total energy stored in<br />

the circuit at time t.<br />

R a b<br />

S<br />

V<br />

C<br />

L<br />

⊲ Problem 6.26<br />

Show that the rms voltage of the pictured “sawtooth” wave is V 0 / √ 3.<br />

V<br />

V o<br />

-V o<br />

⊲ Problem 6.27<br />

What is the resistance of a light bulb that uses an average power of 75W<br />

when connected to a 60Hz power source having a maximum voltage of<br />

170 V? What is the resistance of a 100W bulb?<br />

⊲ Problem 6.28<br />

An inductor has an AC current of frequency 50Hz passing through<br />

it. The maximum voltage is 100V and the maximum current is 7.5A.<br />

What is the inductance of the inductor? The frequency is now changed<br />

to ω new while the voltage is held constant. The maximum current is<br />

now 2.5A. What is the angular frequency ω new ?<br />

⊲ Problem 6.29<br />

A 1.0mF capacitor is connected to a standard wall outlet. Determine<br />

the current in the capacitor at t = (1/180)s, assuming that at t = 0<br />

the energy stored on the capacitor is zero.<br />

⊲ Problem 6.30<br />

For what linear frequencies does a 22.0µF capacitor have a impedance<br />

below 175Ω? Over this same frequency range , what is the impedance<br />

of a 44.0µF?<br />

⊲ Problem 6.31<br />

A sinusoidal voltage v(t) = V max cos ωt is applied to a capacitor. Write<br />

an expression for the instantaneous charge on the capacitor. What is<br />

the instantaneous current in the circuit?<br />

⊲ Problem 6.32<br />

At what frequency does the inductive impedance of a 57µH inductor<br />

equal the capacitive impedance of a 57µF capacitor.<br />

t


134 Time Varying Fields 6.9<br />

⊲ Problem 6.33<br />

A series AC circuit contains the following components: R = 150Ω, L =<br />

250mH, C = 2.00µF, and a generator with V max = 120V operating at<br />

50.0Hz. Calculate the (a) inductive impedance, (b) capacitive impedance,<br />

(c) impedance, (d) maximum current, and (e) phase angle.<br />

⊲ Problem 6.34<br />

An RLC circuit consists of a 150Ω resistor, a 21µF capacitor, and a<br />

460mH inductor, connected in series with a 120V, 60Hz function generator.<br />

What is the phase angle between the current and the applied<br />

voltage? Which reaches its maximum earlier, the current or the voltage?<br />

⊲ Problem 6.35<br />

Calculate the resonance frequency of a series RLC circuit for which<br />

C = 8.40µF and L = 120mH.<br />

⊲ Problem 6.36<br />

An RLC circuit is used in a radio to tune into an FM station broadcasting<br />

at 99.7MHz. The resistance in the circuit is 12.0Ω, and the<br />

inductance is 1.40µH. What capacitance should be used?


6.10 Summary 135<br />

§ 6.10 Summary<br />

Definitions<br />

Facts<br />

Theorems<br />

Ampere’s Law:<br />

∮<br />

⃗B · ⃗dl = µ 0<br />

∫<br />

Faraday’s Law:<br />

∮<br />

∫<br />

⃗J · dA ⃗ d<br />

+ µ 0 ɛ 0<br />

dt<br />

⃗E · ⃗dl = − d dt<br />

∫<br />

⃗B · ⃗ dA<br />

⃗E · ⃗ dA<br />

AC Circuits<br />

Capacitor: The phase of the voltage across a capacitor is 90 ◦ behind<br />

the phase of the current through the capacitor. The amplitude of the<br />

voltage and current are related as follows.<br />

V C 0 = 1<br />

ωC I C 0<br />

Inductor: The phase of the voltage across an inductor is 90 ◦ ahead<br />

of the phase of the current through the inductor. The amplitude of the<br />

voltage and current are related as follows.<br />

V L0 = ωL I L0


136 Wave Optics 7.10


7.1 Maxwell Equations 137<br />

7 Wave Optics<br />

§ 7.1 Maxwell Equations<br />

Let us write down, in one place, all of the fundamental equations<br />

about the electric and magnetic fields.<br />

Gauss ′ s Law<br />

Faraday ′ s Law<br />

Ampere ′ s Law<br />

Gauss ′ s Law for B<br />

∮<br />

∮<br />

∮<br />

∮<br />

⃗E · dA ⃗ = 1 ∫<br />

ɛ 0<br />

⃗E · ⃗dl = − d dt<br />

∫<br />

⃗B · ⃗dl = µ 0<br />

⃗B · ⃗ dA = 0<br />

ρ dV<br />

∫<br />

⃗B · ⃗ dA<br />

⃗J · ⃗ dA + µ 0 ɛ 0<br />

d<br />

dt<br />

∫<br />

⃗E · ⃗ dA<br />

These equations as a group are known as the Maxwell Equations.<br />

The last equation, which we have not discussed before, can be<br />

understood to say that there is no magnetic equivalent to the electric<br />

charge. That is, that there are no magnetic charges, places where<br />

magnetic field lines begin or end, thus that magnetic field lines do not<br />

end. If you want to think of the magnetic field as a flowing fluid, with<br />

B the velocity of the fluid, then this law says that the fluid does not<br />

compress: B flows like water, when it spreads out the velocity decreases,<br />

when it goes through a narrow region it speeds up, the volume rate of<br />

flow is a constant.<br />

Ok, so the new law tells us that there are no magnetic charge, let<br />

us see what the Maxwell equations look like in a region where there is<br />

no electric charge (ρ = 0) and no current (J = 0).


138 Wave Optics 7.1<br />

Gauss ′ s Law<br />

Faraday ′ s Law<br />

Ampere ′ s Law<br />

a new Law<br />

∮<br />

∮<br />

∮<br />

∮<br />

⃗E · dA ⃗ = 0<br />

⃗E · ⃗dl = − d ∫<br />

⃗B · dA<br />

dt<br />

⃗<br />

∫<br />

⃗B · ⃗dl d<br />

= µ 0 ɛ 0<br />

⃗E · dA<br />

dt<br />

⃗<br />

⃗B · ⃗ dA = 0<br />

You can see that the equations are essentially the same in E and B.<br />

Investigating these equations led Maxwell to discover that in regions<br />

where there is no current or charge that there can be traveling waves<br />

as pictured below.<br />

x<br />

y<br />

B<br />

E<br />

E<br />

B<br />

z<br />

time increasing<br />

E<br />

B<br />

E<br />

B<br />

E<br />

B<br />

E<br />

B<br />

B<br />

E<br />

E<br />

B<br />

B<br />

E<br />

E<br />

B<br />

What is drawn is the magnetic field and electric field at various posi-


7.2 Describing Oscillations 139<br />

tions along the z-axis. Notice that the magnitude of the field oscillates,<br />

as one moves along the z-axis. This pattern of spacial oscillations of<br />

the field, travels to the right along the axis as time passes. Also notice<br />

that E and B are perpendicular, and that the direction of travel is<br />

perpendicular to both E and B.<br />

Maxwell also found that the equations predict the velocity at which<br />

these electromagnetic waves travel.<br />

√ 1<br />

v EM =<br />

µ 0 ɛ 0<br />

From the known values of µ 0 and ɛ 0 , Maxwell computed that the velocity<br />

of these EM waves is the same as the velocity of light. He<br />

concluded, rightly, that light and electromagnetic waves are the same<br />

thing. This was a huge leap in our understanding of light.<br />

Fact: Electromagnetic Waves and Light<br />

Light is an electromagnetic wave.<br />

⊲ Problem 7.1<br />

Show that 1/ √ µ 0 ɛ 0 = c.<br />

§ 7.2 Describing Oscillations<br />

We need some terminology to make it easier to talk about sinusoidal<br />

waves and oscillations. The central idea of a wave is encapsulated<br />

in the term phase of an oscillation. The word phase is used here in the<br />

same way as the word is used to describe the cycle of the moon: new<br />

moon, waxing crescent, first quarter, full moon, etc.<br />

In a system with a periodic cycle, the phase of the system describes<br />

what point in the cycle the system is currently occupying.<br />

Recall from the section on AC circuits that we can describe a<br />

sinusoidal oscillation as the horizontal component of a rotation. Thus<br />

the phase of a sinusoidal oscillation can be described by giving the angle<br />

of rotation, φ. When the phase is φ = 0, the oscillation is at its greatest<br />

positive extension. When the phase is φ = π/2 the oscillation is at zero<br />

and with a negative velocity. When the phase is φ = π the oscillation<br />

is at its greatest negative extension. When the phase is φ = 3π/2 the<br />

oscillation is zero but with a positive velocity. These and other phases<br />

of an oscillation are depicted in the figure below.


140 Wave Optics 7.2<br />

-A 0 A<br />

φ = 0<br />

φ = π/4<br />

φ = 2π/4<br />

φ = 3π/4<br />

φ = 4π/4<br />

φ = 5π/4<br />

φ = 6π/4<br />

φ = 7π/4<br />

φ = 8π/4<br />

The actual value of the displacement (x) is the amplitude of the oscillation<br />

times the cosine of the phase angle.<br />

Displacement = Amplitude × cos φ<br />

x = A cos φ


7.3 Describing Waves 141<br />

For a harmonic oscillator the phase increases at a constant rate:<br />

dφ<br />

dt = ω −→ φ = ωt + φ 0<br />

and so the displacement is<br />

x = A cos(ωt + φ 0 )<br />

⊲ Problem 7.2<br />

An oscillator has an amplitude of 3.2. At this instant the displacement<br />

of the oscillator is 1.4. What are the two possible phases of the oscillator<br />

at this instant?<br />

⊲ Problem 7.3<br />

You have a mass connected to a spring.<br />

0 x<br />

You start the mass oscillating in the following ways. What is the initial<br />

phase φ 0 in each case.<br />

(a) Stretch the spring to the right, at t = 0 release the mass.<br />

(b) Compress the spring to the left, at t = 0 release the mass.<br />

(c) At t = 0 strike the mass so that it begins moving to the left.<br />

(d) At t = 0 strike the mass so that it begins moving to the right.<br />

(e) At t = 0 the mass is at the position x 0 = 2.0m and has a velocity<br />

of v 0 = 3.0 m rad<br />

s<br />

(assume that ω = 5.0<br />

s ).<br />

⊲ Problem 7.4<br />

It takes a time of T = 0.025s in order for an oscillator to complete one<br />

cycle. What is the angular frequency (ω) of the oscillator?<br />

§ 7.3 Describing Waves<br />

Consider dropping a rock into a pool of still water. Ripples spread<br />

out from the point at which the rock enters the water. If you examine<br />

the motion of the water at one fixed point, the surface of the water<br />

moves up and down as successive waves move past. The height of<br />

the water at our fixed point is an oscillation. This is true at other<br />

points a well, at each location the height of the water oscillates. Since<br />

an oscillation is so simple, the only thing that can differ between one<br />

point and another is the amplitude of the oscillation and the initial<br />

phase φ 0 . Let us write the height of the water, at position ⃗r and time<br />

t, as y(⃗r, t). Since the oscillation at each point is a harmonic oscillation<br />

we can write:<br />

y(r, t) = A(⃗r) cos [ωt + φ 0 (⃗r)]


142 Wave Optics 7.3<br />

Where the amplitude A(⃗r) and initial phase φ 0 (⃗r) both depend on the<br />

position ⃗r.<br />

In the situation where the wave spreads out from a point source<br />

(such as a rock dropped in the water), the wave travels outward at a<br />

speed v. Because of this, the oscillation at a distance r from the source<br />

will be the same as the oscillation of the source, only delayed by the<br />

time (t d = r/v) it takes for the wave to travel the distance r from<br />

the source to the observation point. Thus the phase of the oscillation<br />

at a position r at a time t + t d , will be the same as the phase of the<br />

oscillation at the source (r = 0) at time t.<br />

φ(r, t + t d ) = φ(0, t)<br />

ω(t + t d ) + φ 0 (r) = ωt + φ 0 (0)<br />

φ 0 (r) = φ 0 (0) − ωt d<br />

φ 0 (r) = φ 0 (0) − ω r v<br />

φ 0 (r) = φ 0 (0) − kr with k ≡ ω v<br />

For convenience we usually pick our zero of time so that φ 0 (0) = 0,<br />

so that φ 0 (r) = −kr and y(r, t) = A(r) cos(ωt − kr).<br />

Theorem: Wave due to a Sinusoidal Point Source<br />

A general wave radiating from a point source can be written down<br />

mathematically as follows:<br />

ψ(r, t) = A(r) cos (ωt − kr)<br />

( 2π<br />

= A(r) cos<br />

T t − 2π )<br />

λ x<br />

where k = ω/v and T ≡ 2π ω and λ ≡ 2π k<br />

are the period and<br />

wavelength as described below.<br />

Definition: Wavelength<br />

If you freeze a sinusoidal wave at one point in time, the distance<br />

you must travel along the wave in order to go through a complete<br />

cycle of the oscillation, is called the wavelength. We use the symbol<br />

λ to represent the wavelength in equations.<br />

ψ<br />

λ<br />

x


7.3 Describing Waves 143<br />

Definition: Period and Frequency<br />

If you stand in one place and allow the wave to pass you, the<br />

time you must wait in order to be back at the same point in the<br />

oscillation as when you started is called the period. We use the<br />

symbol T to represent the period in equations.<br />

ψ<br />

T<br />

t<br />

The frequency is the inverse of the period.<br />

f = 1 T<br />

Note that the angular frequency is ω = 2πf. Both frequencies are<br />

really the same thing, they both measure the rate of the oscillation, it<br />

is just that one is in the units of radians and the other is in the units<br />

of cycles. So you can convert between units by using the fact that one<br />

seconds = radians cycles<br />

cycle seconds<br />

cycle is 2π radians: ω = radians<br />

= 2π f.<br />

Notice that the realtionship between the angular frequency and the<br />

wave number can be rewritten in terms of the wavelength and period.<br />

k = ω 2π/T<br />

−→ 2π/λ = −→ λ = vT<br />

v<br />

v<br />

So we can also think of the wavelength as the distance the wave travels<br />

in one period, or writing the equation as T = λ/v, we can think of the<br />

period as the time it takes to travel one wavelength.<br />

Let us summarize the relationships between the different parameters<br />

that describe a wave.<br />

Time scale:<br />

ω = 2π<br />

T = 2πf<br />

Length scale:<br />

k = 2π λ<br />

Relationship between time and length scales:<br />

k = ω v<br />

OR λ = vT OR λf = v


144 Wave Optics 7.4<br />

⊲ Problem 7.5<br />

For the following wave, graphed at seven different times, determine<br />

the amplitude, wavelength, period, frequency, angular frequency, wave<br />

number, and velocity. Write the function y(x, t) that describes the<br />

wave.


7.4 Electromagnetic Waves 145<br />

§ 7.4 Electromagnetic Waves<br />

With our eyes we are able to see electromagnetic (EM) waves that<br />

have wavelengths between about 400nm to 700nm. We experience light<br />

with different wavelengths as different colors, as indicated in the following<br />

table.<br />

Wavelength Frequency Perceived Color<br />

740 to 625 nm 405 to 480 THz red<br />

625 to 590 nm 480 to 510 THz orange<br />

590 to 565 nm 510 to 530 THz yellow<br />

565 to 520 nm 530 to 580 THz green<br />

520 to 500 nm 580 to 600 THz cyan<br />

500 to 430 nm 600 to 700 THz blue<br />

430 to 380 nm 700 to 790 THz violet<br />

Note that the frequency and wavelength of an EM wave are related by<br />

λf = c where c is the speed of light.<br />

But this is only a small range of EM spectrum.<br />

We see that there are a number of familiar items in the spectrum: x-<br />

rays, microwaves, and radio waves are all EM waves. The range of<br />

the spectrum just above and just below the visible range are called the<br />

ultraviolet (UV) and infrared (IR). The prefixes ultra (above) and infra<br />

(below) refer to the frequency not the wavelength.<br />

⊲ Problem 7.6<br />

Your microwave oven is filled with EM waves with a frequency of about<br />

3 GHz. What is the wavelength of the wave? The microwave oven heats<br />

up the objects in the oven, because the oscillating EM wave causes an<br />

oscillating electric force on the electric dipoles in the object, which<br />

causes the dipoles to oscillate. The frequency of a standard microwave


146 Wave Optics 7.5<br />

oven is tuned to a natural oscillation frequency of the water molecule.<br />

Note that a cellular phone uses about the same frequency as an oven, a<br />

cellular phone is a small microwave emitter, so you are slowly cooking<br />

your brain when you hold the phone to your head.<br />

⊲ Problem 7.7<br />

Compute the wavelength of an FM radio station that transmits at a<br />

frequency of 94.1 MHz.<br />

§ 7.5 Interference of Waves<br />

We have claimed that light is an EM wave because it has the same<br />

speed as an EM wave. We have not looked at the consequences of<br />

the fact that light is a wave. One of the principle characteristics of<br />

waves is their ability to interfere with each other when two or more of<br />

the waves are combined. The following example will demonstrate this<br />

interference.<br />

Consider the follow situation. You have a point source of waves,<br />

and near this source you have a reflecting surface.<br />

Source<br />

Detector<br />

Reflecting Surface<br />

The wave arrives at the detector by two different paths, a direct path<br />

and a reflected path. The wave travels a distance r 1 along the direct<br />

path and a distance r 2 along the reflected path. If the reflected path<br />

was blocked the oscillation at the detector would be just that due to the<br />

direct path, ψ 1 (t) = A 1 cos(ωt + φ 1 ) where φ 1 = −kr 1 . Similarly if the<br />

direct path is blocked the oscillation at the detector would be just that<br />

due to the reflected path, ψ 2 (t) = A 2 cos(ωt + φ 2 ) where φ 2 = −kr 2 .<br />

When both paths are open then the resultant wave at the detector will<br />

be the sum of the waves from each path<br />

ψ(t) = ψ 1 (t) + ψ 2 (t)<br />

= A 1 cos(ωt + φ 1 ) + A 2 cos(ωt + φ 2 )<br />

Using the phasor diagram for these two oscillations we can find the<br />

amplitude of their sum.


7.5 Interference of Waves 147<br />

I<br />

I<br />

A<br />

A 2<br />

The law of cosines gives the amplitude, A, in terms of the amplitudes<br />

φ 2<br />

A 1<br />

A 1<br />

A 2<br />

φ 2 - φ 1<br />

R<br />

φ 1<br />

R<br />

A 1 and A 2 .<br />

A 2 = A 2 1 + A 2 2 + 2A 1 A 2 cos(φ 2 − φ 1 )<br />

Theorem: Addition of <strong>Two</strong> Waves<br />

If two waves (with the same frequency) come together at a detector,<br />

the amplitude A of the resultant wave at the detector will be as<br />

follows.<br />

A 2 = A 2 1 + A 2 2 + 2A 1 A 2 cos(φ 2 − φ 1 )<br />

In general the power carried by a wave is proportional to the square<br />

of the amplitude of the wave, so this result can be rewritten in<br />

terms of the power.<br />

P = P 1 + P 2 + 2 √ P 1<br />

√<br />

P 2 cos(φ 2 − φ 1 )<br />

Below is graphed the power at a detector where two waves come<br />

together, The power of one wave is 25 mW and the power of the other<br />

waves is 4 mW.<br />

P (mW)<br />

0 π 2π 3π 4π<br />

φ 2 - φ 1<br />

Notice the following points:<br />

• The power at the detector can be less with both sources on than with<br />

just one of them on.<br />

• The maximum power occurs when the phase difference is an even<br />

multiple of π. The waves as said to be perfectly in-phase.


148 Wave Optics 7.6<br />

• The minimum power occurs when the phase difference is an odd<br />

multiple of π. The waves as said to be directly out-of-phase.<br />

• When the phase difference is an odd multiple of π/2, the power is<br />

equal to the sum of the powers of the individual signals.<br />

⊲ Problem 7.8<br />

Suppose that you are at home talking on your wireless phone, and you<br />

walk near your refrigerator. Since the refrigerator is made of metal<br />

it acts as a reflector for the microwave signal going to and from your<br />

phone. Because of this there are two paths between your phone and<br />

the transceiver (the base that phone sits in) that it is communicating<br />

with.<br />

x<br />

Phone<br />

Refrigerator<br />

Transceiver<br />

When you are a distance x from the refrigerator the signal that reflects<br />

from the refrigerator must travel a distance 2x further. Assuming that<br />

the reflected amplitude is one half of the direct amplitude, graph the<br />

power of the signal as a function of your distance from the refrigerator.<br />

Assume that the wavelength of the signal is 10cm. Are there places<br />

that it would be better to avoid?<br />

§ 7.6 Interferometer<br />

It is possible to build a device that measures very small motions<br />

by using interference.<br />

The device represented in the diagram below is called an interferometer.


7.7 Interference of <strong>Two</strong> Sources 149<br />

Source<br />

Mirror A<br />

Half-silvered<br />

mirror<br />

Detector<br />

Mirror B<br />

A beam of light strikes a half-silvered mirror. The half silvered mirror<br />

reflects half of the wave toward mirror A and transmits the other half<br />

toward mirror B. The part that strikes mirror A, is reflected back (to<br />

the right) toward the half-silvered mirror where it is again split, half<br />

passing through to the detector on the left and half being reflected back<br />

toward the source. The part of the beam that strikes mirror B is also<br />

split so that half reaches the detector.<br />

So we see that there are two path by which light can reach the<br />

detector, one path that has been reflected from mirror A, and another<br />

path that has been reflected from mirror B. By adjusting the location<br />

of mirror A we can adjust the path length of the light. In this way<br />

the relative phase of path A and B can be adjusted. Suppose that we<br />

have adjusted the path length so that the power at the detector is a<br />

maximum. Then φ A − φ B is an even multiple of π.<br />

Now suppose that we move mirror A a distance of λ 4<br />

to the left.<br />

This will increase the path length of by ∆r A = 2 λ 4 = λ 2<br />

since the path<br />

includes the extra bit of length twice, once on the way to the mirror and<br />

once on the way back from the mirror. But a change in the path length<br />

of ∆r A will change the phase by −k∆r A = − 2π λ<br />

λ 2 = −π. Thus φ A −φ B<br />

is now an odd multiple of π, and the power will be at a minimum. By<br />

observing the intensity of the light at the detector we can easily tell if<br />

it has gone from bright to dim (maximum to minimum). Thus we can<br />

easily detect when the mirror has been moved by λ/4. A common laser<br />

pointer has a wavelength of something like 650nm so one quarter of this<br />

is 162nm. So an interferometer can be used as a “ruler” with markings<br />

about 162nm apart. This is a very small distance, for comparison, the<br />

finest human hair is about 20,000 nm in diameter.


150 Wave Optics 7.8<br />

§ 7.7 Interference of <strong>Two</strong> Sources<br />

Suppose that we have two wave sources that are in phase with each<br />

other.<br />

Detector<br />

r A<br />

r B<br />

Source A<br />

Source B<br />

While the sources are in phase, the waves are not when they reach the<br />

detector because they must travel a different distance: at the detector<br />

the phase difference between the waves will be φ A −φ B = k(r B −r A ) =<br />

k ∆r = 2π ∆r<br />

λ<br />

. The minimum and maximum power occur when this<br />

phase difference is an odd and even multiple of π. That is when<br />

2π ∆r<br />

{ max m is even.<br />

λ = mπ min m is odd<br />

∆r = m λ { max m is even.<br />

2 min m is odd<br />

Theorem: Interference of <strong>Two</strong> Sources<br />

If you have two wave sources that are in phase with each other,<br />

the minimum and maximum of the power occur at points where<br />

the path difference is and odd (min) or even (max) multiple of half<br />

of the wavelength of the wave.<br />

∆r = m λ { max m is even.<br />

2 min m is odd<br />

⊲ Problem 7.9<br />

Draw two points that are 3 cm apart on a piece of paper.<br />

(a) Find all points on the paper that have ∆r = 0.<br />

(b) Find all points on the paper that have ∆r = 1cm.<br />

(c) Find all points on the paper that have ∆r = 2cm.<br />

(d) If λ = 1.0cm what are the locations of the maximum and minimum<br />

of power?<br />

(e) If λ = 2.0cm what are the locations of the maximum and minimum<br />

of power?


7.8 Far Field Approximation 151<br />

§ 7.8 Far Field Approximation<br />

In most cases the detector is placed far from the two sources, far<br />

in the sense that the distance from the sources to the detector r is<br />

much bigger than the distance between the sources, d. There is a<br />

useful approximation for the path difference that can be used when the<br />

detector is far from the source.<br />

First consider the case when the detector<br />

is not far, as pictured in the figure to<br />

Detector<br />

the right. Notice that if we make of a section<br />

of arc, with the center at the detector,<br />

Source<br />

and going through the closest source, and<br />

then consider the section of the path from<br />

the furthest source that is cut off by this<br />

arc. This cut off section (marked as ∆r in<br />

the figure) is equal to the path difference.<br />

Δr<br />

Also notice that the arc is perpendicular to<br />

Source<br />

the path.<br />

Now imagine moving the detector further from the sources, as<br />

pictured in the diagram below. The section of arc that is between the<br />

two paths, subtends a smaller and smaller angle, and thus this section<br />

of arc becomes closer and closer to a straight line. At the same time<br />

the grey region becomes a right triangle.<br />

θ<br />

Let us examining this right triangle<br />

more closely. We see from the diagram<br />

to the right that<br />

sin θ = ∆r −→ ∆r = d sin θ<br />

d<br />

This is a very useful result, that allows<br />

us to find the path difference from the<br />

distance between the sources and the angle<br />

to the detector.<br />

Combining this with our previous result, ∆r = m λ 2<br />

, we find the<br />

d<br />

θ<br />

Δr<br />

θ


152 Wave Optics 7.9<br />

angles for the minima and maxima.<br />

d sin θ m = m λ { max m is even.<br />

2 min m is odd<br />

⊲ Problem 7.10<br />

You set up a sheet of aluminum foil to block a microwave transmitter.<br />

You now punch two holes in the foil, so that the microwaves pass<br />

through the holes. The holes are 10 cm apart. You now place a microwave<br />

detector on a track that is parallel to the foil and 3 meters away.<br />

By sliding the detector along the track you observe that the response<br />

of the detector is as shown in the diagram. What is the wavelength of<br />

the microwave?<br />

Foil with holes<br />

x<br />

120cm<br />

80cm<br />

Source<br />

10 cm<br />

Detector Response<br />

as a function<br />

of position<br />

40cm<br />

0cm<br />

300 cm<br />

§ 7.9 Thin Film Interference<br />

The swirling colors that you see reflected in a<br />

soap bubble and in puddles in a parking lot are a<br />

result of interference. Let us start by considering<br />

the colors in the puddles. The reason that you<br />

only see this in a parking lot is because it only<br />

happens when there is a thin film of oil on the top<br />

of the water. Consider the diagram to the right,<br />

Oil t<br />

of the layers of a puddle. At the bottom we have<br />

the pavement of the parking lot. Next there is the<br />

pool of water. On top of the water is a thin layer of<br />

Water<br />

Pavement<br />

oil. The thickness of the oil has been exaggerated<br />

so that we can see what is happening.<br />

The light from the sun strikes the surface of the oil and some of it<br />

is reflected back toward the detector (your eye). The rest of the light


7.9 Thin Film Interference 153<br />

passes into the oil, were it proceeds until it reaches the water, at which<br />

point part of the light is reflected back toward the detector. The light<br />

that is not reflected passes into the water and eventually strikes the<br />

pavement, where it is mostly absorbed, since the pavement is black. In<br />

the end then, we have light from the sun reflected into the detector,<br />

by two paths, one path is reflected from the air-oil interface and the<br />

other path is reflected from the oil-water interface. If the light is nearly<br />

normal to the surface the path difference will be twice the thickness of<br />

the oil: ∆r = 2t. The light will be strongly reflected when the two<br />

paths are in-phase, that is when ∆r = m λ 2<br />

with m even. Thus in order<br />

for the light to be strongly reflected we need,<br />

2t = m λ 4t<br />

−→ λ =<br />

2<br />

m<br />

So only wavelengths that “match” the thickness of the oil will be reflected.<br />

This is why you see swirling colors, what you are seeing is the<br />

different thicknesses of the oil film, and for each thickness there is a<br />

particular color that gets reflected.<br />

There are a two complications to thin films that we need to consider.<br />

The first complication is that the wavelength of light changes when<br />

it passes into the oil. This is because the light slows down in the oil.<br />

Definition: Index of Refraction<br />

The index of refraction of an optical medium is the ratio of the<br />

speed of light in a vacuum and the speed of light in the medium.<br />

n = c v<br />

Let λ be the wavelength in a vacuum, then λf = c. Let λ ′ be the<br />

wavelength in the medium, then λ ′ f = v. Taking the ratio of these two<br />

equations we find<br />

λf<br />

λ ′ f = c v = n<br />

Solving for λ ′ we find the following result.<br />

Theorem: Wavelength in a Medium<br />

λ ′ = λ n


154 Wave Optics 7.10<br />

The reason that we care the wavelength has changed, is that when<br />

we use the result that ∆r = m λ 2<br />

we need to use the wavelength where<br />

the path difference ∆r occurs. In the case considered above, the extra<br />

bit of path occurs within the oil, so we need to use the wavelength in<br />

the oil.<br />

In order to understand the root cause of the second complication,<br />

consider a soap bubble again. If you make a soap bubble and watch it<br />

carefully, you will notice that just before it pops, it appears that the top<br />

of the bubble has a hole in it. There is not actually a hole, but the top<br />

of the bubble looks like it has a hole because when the bubble gets very<br />

thin, no light is reflected from the surface of the bubble. Let us consider<br />

what our prediction would be for a very thin bubble. From our work<br />

with the oil film we expect that we will get a maximum reflection when<br />

2t = mλ/2, and m is even. Recall also that m = 0 gives a maximum,<br />

so t ≈ 0 should give a maximum for all wavelengths. Thus we expect<br />

the soap bubble to reflect very well when the film of bubble juice gets<br />

very thin. The truth is just the opposite.<br />

The key to this puzzle is to understand that when a wave is reflected<br />

it can be inverted, that is the direction of the displacement can<br />

be reversed. But a reversal is the same as a π phase shift.<br />

Fact: Reflection Phase Shift<br />

When a wave is reflected at an interface between two media there<br />

will be a π phase shift in the reflected wave if the index of refraction<br />

of the incident medium is lower than the index of refraction of the<br />

reflecting medium. If the incident medium has a higher index,<br />

there is no phase shift.<br />

⊲ Problem 7.11<br />

Explain using the reflection phase shift why a thin soap bubble reflects<br />

no light.<br />

§ 7.10 Single Slit Diffraction<br />

If a wave is passed through a rectangular hole that is much narrower<br />

in one direction than the other we find that we get an interference<br />

pattern like we do with a two source. Such a hole is usually referred to<br />

as a slit since it is so narrow in one direction.


7.11 Homework 155<br />

Second Min<br />

First Min<br />

Source<br />

θ<br />

Central Max<br />

Fact: Single Slit Diffraction<br />

If light is passed through a single slit of width a, then the angle<br />

between the central maximum and the first minimum is given by<br />

a sin θ = λ<br />

§ 7.11 Homework<br />

⊲ Problem 7.12<br />

A pair of speakers is configured as shown, with a microphone placed directly<br />

in front of one of the speakers. Sound waves having a wavelength<br />

10 cm are coming from the speakers. The speakers are in phase with<br />

each other. What is the minimum distance d between the speakers so<br />

that no sound is heard at the microphone labeled P ?<br />

1 m<br />

P<br />

d<br />

⊲ Problem 7.13<br />

A material having an index of refraction of 1.30 is used to coat a piece<br />

of glass (n = 1.50). What should be the minimum thickness of this film<br />

to minimize reflection of 500nm light?<br />

⊲ Problem 7.14<br />

A soap bubble of index of refraction 1.33 strongly reflects both the red<br />

and the green components of white light. What film thickness allows<br />

this to happen? (In air, λ red = 700nm, λ green = 500nm.)


156 Wave Optics 7.11<br />

⊲ Problem 7.15<br />

A beam of 560nm light passes through two closely spaced glass plates, as<br />

shown below. For what minimum nonzero value of the plate separation<br />

d is the transmitted power a maximum?<br />

d<br />

⊲ Problem 7.16<br />

A pair of narrow parallel slits separated by 0.25mm is illuminated by<br />

green light (λ = 546.2nm). The interference pattern is observed on a<br />

screen 1.2m away from the plane of the slits. Calculate the distance<br />

from the central maximum to the first bright region on either side of<br />

the central maximum and between the first and second dark bands.<br />

⊲ Problem 7.17<br />

On a day when the speed of sound is 354 m s<br />

, a 2000Hz sound wave<br />

impinges on two slits 30.0cm apart. At what angle is the first maximum<br />

located? If the sound wave is replaced by 3.00cm microwaves, what<br />

slit separation gives the same angle for the first maximum? If the<br />

slit separation is 1.00µm, light of what frequency gives the same first<br />

maximum angle?<br />

⊲ Problem 7.18<br />

<strong>Two</strong> waves with amplitudes y 1 = A cos(ωt−kd 1 +δ) and y 2 = A cos(ωt−<br />

kd 2 ) interfere with each other. Prove that the resultant amplitude,<br />

y 1 + y 2 = y is<br />

( k<br />

y = 2A cos<br />

2 (d 2 − d 1 ) +<br />

2)<br />

δ (<br />

cos ωt − k 2 (d 1 + d 2 ) + δ )<br />

2<br />

Choose d 1 = d 2 = 0 and make plots of y 1 (t), y 2 (t), and y(t) for δ = π/8,<br />

π/4, π/2, and π.<br />

⊲ Problem 7.19<br />

<strong>Two</strong> slits are separated by a distance d. Light of wavelength λ comes<br />

from a far distant source and strikes the slits at an angle θ 1 as in the<br />

figure below. An interference maximum is formed on a screen that is<br />

far to the right of the slits. The maximum occurs at an angle θ 2 . Show<br />

that sin θ 2 − sin θ 1 = mλ/d, where m is an integer.


7.11 Homework 157<br />

θ 2<br />

d<br />

θ 1<br />

θ 2<br />

θ 1<br />

⊲ Problem 7.20<br />

A material having an index of refraction of 1.30 is used to coat a piece<br />

of glass (n = 1.50). What should be the minimum thickness of this film<br />

to minimize reflection of 500nm light?<br />

⊲ Problem 7.21<br />

A soap bubble of index of refraction 1.33 strongly reflects both the red<br />

and the green components of white light. What film thickness allows<br />

this to happen? (In air, λ red = 700nm, λ green = 500nm.)<br />

⊲ Problem 7.22<br />

Light of wavelength 600 nm is used to illuminate, at near zero angle<br />

of incidence, two glass plates that are stacked on top of each other.<br />

At one end the plates are separated slightly because a wire has been<br />

placed between them on this end. The wire is 0.5 mm in diameter.<br />

How many bright fringes appear along the total length of the plates,<br />

when the plates are viewed from the same side as the light source?<br />

⊲ Problem 7.23<br />

The double slit equation d sin θ = mλ and the equation for a single slit<br />

a sin θ = mλ are sometimes confused. For each equation, define the<br />

symbols and explain the equation’s application.<br />

⊲ Problem 7.24<br />

Light from a He-Ne laser (λ = 632.8nm) is incident on a single slit.<br />

What is the minimum width for which no diffraction minima are observed?<br />

⊲ Problem 7.25<br />

A screen is placed 50cm from a single slit, which is illuminated with<br />

690nm light. If the distance between the first and third minima in the<br />

diffraction pattern is 3.0mm, what is the width of the slit?<br />

⊲ Problem 7.26<br />

Light from an argon laser strikes a diffraction grating that has 5310<br />

lines/cm. The central and first order principal maximum are separated


158 Wave Optics 7.11<br />

by 0.488 m on a wall that is 1.72 m from the grating. Determine the<br />

wavelength of the laser light.<br />

⊲ Problem 7.27<br />

Paul Revere received information from a person in a church steeple that<br />

was 1.8 miles away, by the number of lanterns that were displayed:<br />

”One if by land and, two if by sea.” What would be the minimum<br />

separation between two lantern for Paul Revere to be able to distinguish<br />

them? Assume that the diameter of his pupils was 4.00mm and that<br />

the light had a wavelength of about 580nm.<br />

⊲ Problem 7.28<br />

Redo all the problems in the book starting from chapter 1, but add one<br />

to each constant. Add all of the numerical answers and subtract 1 for<br />

each non numerical answer. What number do you get?


7.12 Summary 159<br />

§ 7.12 Summary<br />

Definitions<br />

• Index of refraction: n = c v<br />

Theorems<br />

• A traveling sinusoidal wave can be represented by<br />

where ω = 2π<br />

T and k = 2π λ .<br />

• For a traveling wave: λf = v.<br />

y = A cos(ωt − kx)<br />

• Interference of two waves: If two waves are added together with<br />

powers P 1 and P 2 then the resultant power is<br />

P = P 1 + P 2 + 2 √ P 1 P 2 cos(φ 2 − φ 1 )<br />

• Maxima and minima of the power occur when ∆φ = φ 2 − φ 1 is an<br />

even and odd multiple of π, respectively.<br />

• The phase difference due to a path difference is ∆φ path = 2π ∆r<br />

λ<br />

• If a field point is far from two sources a distance d apart then the<br />

path difference is ∆r = d sin θ where θ is the angle between the path to<br />

the field point and the normal to the line connecting the two sources.<br />

• When a wave is reflected at an interface between two media there<br />

will be a π phase shift in the reflected wave if the index of refraction of<br />

the incident medium is lower than the that of the reflecting medium.<br />

• The wave length in a medium is longer than in a vaccum: λ ′ = λ n<br />

• If light is passed through a single slit of width a, then the angle<br />

between the central maximum and the first minimum is given by,<br />

a sin θ = λ


160 Geometric Optics 8.12


8.2 Reflection 161<br />

8 Geometric Optics<br />

§ 8.1 Short Wavelength Limit<br />

In the last section we saw the wave nature of light in the sections<br />

where we considered interference. In many situations these interference<br />

effects are small enough to be ignored. For example if light comes in<br />

through two windows in your house you will not find an unexpected<br />

dark spots in the room where the light from the two windows combines.<br />

Fact: Short Wavelength Limit<br />

When the wavelength of the light is much shorter than the size<br />

of the objects that the light is traveling through, then the wave<br />

nature of the light can be ignored.<br />

For example if you set up a candle and cast shadow of your hand<br />

on the wall, the shadow is a faithful replica of your hand, there is no<br />

interference pattern developed because of the interference between the<br />

light going between different fingers.<br />

In this short wavelength limit we can think of a light source as sending<br />

out rays of light that continue in a straight line unless something stops<br />

them. Because of this use of straight lines, this way of dealing with<br />

light is called Geometric Optics or Ray Optics.<br />

§ 8.2 Reflection<br />

Now consider what happens when a ray of light strikes a mirror.


162 Geometric Optics 8.3<br />

θ i<br />

θ r<br />

Mirror<br />

Fact: Law of reflection<br />

The incident and reflected angles are the same.<br />

θ i = θ r<br />

§ 8.3 Virtual Image<br />

Let us draw some of the other rays that come from the source.<br />

Notice that each ray obeys the law of reflection. This may look<br />

a little confusing, but if we trace the reflected ray back through the<br />

mirror, we see that they all converge on the same point.<br />

Object<br />

Virtual Image


8.4 Snell’s Law 163<br />

We see then that from the point of view of an observer of the reflected<br />

rays, it appears that the object is really behind the mirror, because all<br />

of the rays appear to come from that one point. Our brain makes the<br />

simplest conclusions and assumes that the rays come in a straight line,<br />

not in the bent line that they actually followed.<br />

This type of image is called a virtual image of the object since the<br />

light does not actually come from the image. We will see later, ways<br />

in which it is possible to construct a real image.<br />

§ 8.4 Snell’s Law<br />

When a ray of light strikes an interface between two different media,<br />

some of the light is reflected, and some of the light is transmitted<br />

through the interface.<br />

n i<br />

n t<br />

θ i<br />

θ r<br />

θ t<br />

Note that both the reflected and transmitted beams are deflected from<br />

their original direction. The angle at which the transmitted ray leaves<br />

the interface is given by Snell’s Law.<br />

Fact: Snell’s Law<br />

n t sin θ t = n i sin θ i<br />

We can use Snell’s law to explain a strange phenomenon that you<br />

may have noticed. If you view a fish tank from the corner, you can see<br />

objects in the tank through the front glass and the side glass at the<br />

same time. This is because of the bending of the light when it leaves<br />

the water. The effect is depicted in the diagram below.


164 Geometric Optics 8.5<br />

Eye<br />

Tank<br />

Front<br />

Front View<br />

Both View<br />

Side<br />

View<br />

Side<br />

The dark grey region is the part of the tank that can be seen from both<br />

the front and the side. You can actually see around the corner. This is<br />

really weird. So if you want a wider view from your window, you could<br />

just fill your room with water. Remember to also install the air tanks.<br />

§ 8.5 Virtual Image Caused by Refraction<br />

Consider a shiny coin on the bottom of a swimming pool.<br />

Air<br />

Water<br />

The light comes up from the coin and out into the air. When the light<br />

comes out it spreads out more. This looks similar to the rays reflected<br />

from a mirror. This similarity leads one to wonder if there is a virtual<br />

image of the coin, that is, is there a place where all the rays appear to<br />

originate. The following diagram traces the rays back into the water.


8.5 Virtual Image Caused by Refraction 165<br />

Air<br />

Water<br />

We see that they do not converge on a single point. The location of<br />

the image changes as you view it from different angles. When you get<br />

down low and view it from near the horizon the image is close to the<br />

surface of the water and also displaced horizontally from the object.<br />

As you move your view point upward the image moves away from you<br />

and deeper into the water. When you view from straight overhead the<br />

image is directly over the object and about 1/5 of the way up toward<br />

the surface.<br />

Air<br />

Water<br />

Image from horizon<br />

Image from 45°<br />

Image from directly above<br />

Object<br />

This is very different from the image in a flat mirror. The image in a<br />

flat mirror is in the same position, from any viewpoint in the room.<br />

⊲ Problem 8.1<br />

Consider the beam of light shown going through a prism made of glass<br />

with an index of refraction n.


166 Geometric Optics 8.6<br />

α<br />

β<br />

β<br />

Show that the net deflection of the beam (2β) is<br />

§ 8.6 Thin Lens Equation<br />

Imagine that we take a stack<br />

of prisms as shown in the diagram.<br />

Since the prisms farther<br />

from the middle have a steeper<br />

angle they bend the light ray<br />

more sharply. If we pick the angle<br />

of each prism correctly all<br />

of the rays will converge on the<br />

same point.<br />

2β = 2 arcsin(n sin α 2 ) − α<br />

Such a device was used in old light houses in order to focus the<br />

light on the horizon (where there are ships that want to see the light)<br />

rather than letting it spread out and go into the water or into the sky.<br />

Now imagine that you make<br />

the prisms in the middle thicker,<br />

without changing the angle of<br />

the faces. We would now end<br />

up with a smooth curved surface.<br />

Since the angle of faces was not<br />

changed the light would still converge<br />

on the single point. You<br />

can see that you get a lens. This<br />

type of lens is called a converging<br />

lens, since it bends the rays<br />

toward each other.<br />

focal length<br />

focal<br />

point<br />

The optical axis of the lens is a line that passes through the center<br />

of the lens, that is normal to the surface of the lens. A focus is a point<br />

where rays converge. The focus of rays that are parallel to the optical<br />

axis is called the principle focus or focal point. The distance between<br />

the lens and the focal point is called the focal length of the lens.<br />

Suppose that you set up your lens at sunrise, so that the rays are<br />

parallel to the optical axis and converge at the focal point. If you come


8.6 Thin Lens Equation 167<br />

back in an hour the sun will have moved up in the sky, and the rays will<br />

no longer be parallel to the optical axis. The rays will still converge at<br />

a point but it will not be the focal point of the lens. The new focus<br />

will be in the focal plane, a plane parallel to the plane of the lens and<br />

one focal length away from the lens.<br />

Focal Plane<br />

Optical Axis<br />

Notice that the ray that passes through the center of the lens is not<br />

deflected. This is a particularly nice ray for doing constructions of<br />

images, as we will see. In this case it allows us to find the location of<br />

the focus, since the focus is at the intersection of this straight line and<br />

the focal plane. Once we have found the focus, using the central ray,<br />

we can draw the other rays, because they must pass though the focus<br />

also.<br />

We can also reverse these diagrams: Light that comes from a point<br />

in the focal plane and strikes the lens leaves the lens parallel to the ray<br />

that passes through the center of the lens.<br />

We have seen what happens to groups of rays that are parallel to<br />

each other. Let us now see what happens to groups of rays that diverge<br />

from a point that is not in the focal plane. Suppose that you have light<br />

radiating from a point. The point is indicated by the fat arrow on<br />

the left, in the following diagram. We follow the light from this point<br />

source to it’s focus.


168 Geometric Optics 8.6<br />

In the diagram we are able to draw the three rays that are bolded,<br />

because they are, (top ray) parallel to the optical axis, (middle ray)<br />

through the center, and (bottom ray) through the focal point. These<br />

three rays are called the principle rays. From the three principle rays<br />

(we only needed two really) the location of the focus is determined.<br />

After the location of the focus is determined, the other faint rays are<br />

drawn so that they go through the focus.<br />

Notice that the rays of light actually do pass through the focus. If<br />

we place a piece of paper at that point the paper would be illuminated.<br />

This type of image is called a real image.<br />

x o<br />

x i<br />

y o<br />

y i<br />

f<br />

f<br />

The location and size of the image can be computed from the<br />

location and size of the object.<br />

Theorem: Thin Lens Equations<br />

With the dimensions as shown in the figure above,<br />

1<br />

x o<br />

+ 1 x i<br />

= 1 f<br />

Theorem: Magnification Equations<br />

With the dimensions as shown in the figure above,<br />

= − x i<br />

y o y i<br />

where y is negative if below the optical axis.<br />

x o


8.7 Virtual Image in a Converging Lens 169<br />

⊲ Problem 8.2<br />

Using geometric arguments, prove the thin lens equations.<br />

⊲ Problem 8.3<br />

You have a lens with a focal length of 100cm. You place an object at<br />

150cm from the lens. The object is 3cm tall.<br />

(a) Construct the image location using the principle rays.<br />

(b) Find the location of the image using the thin lens equation.<br />

(c) Find the height of the image from the magnification equation.<br />

§ 8.7 Virtual Image in a Converging Lens<br />

You do not get a real image for all positions of the object. When<br />

the object distance is smaller than the focal length, you get a virtual<br />

image. You have probably notice this effect before while using a magnifying<br />

glass: if you look at something far away through a magnifying<br />

glass, you will se the object upside down. If you move closer to the<br />

object at some point it flips over and appears right side up.<br />

Virtual Image<br />

Real Image<br />

image<br />

paper<br />

lens<br />

paper<br />

lens<br />

image<br />

In the photograph above you can notice a few things. In the photo on<br />

the left, the letters on the page are almost in-focus, this means that<br />

the image is not too far from the page. In contrast, in the photo on the<br />

right, the letters on the page are very out of focus, this tells us that<br />

the image is far from the page. This is verified by the ray diagrams.<br />

Here is a larger diagram, showing the construction of the virtual<br />

image, that corresponds to the photo on the left.


170 Geometric Optics 8.7<br />

-x i<br />

x o<br />

f f<br />

Notice that we still use the three principle rays. The topmost ray in<br />

the figure above strikes the lens as if it came from the focal point. The<br />

dotted line going back to the focal point is an extension of the actual<br />

path of the light ray. Notice also that even though the ray constructed<br />

in this manner does not hit the lens (since the lens was not tall enough)<br />

we can still use the ray to construct the location of the image.<br />

The thin lens and magnification equations can still be used in this<br />

case, but in order to get the algebra to work out correctly you need to<br />

interpret a negative image distance (x i ) as being on the side of the lens<br />

where the light originates from.<br />

Example<br />

Suppose that in the figure above x 0 = 6cm, y 0 = 2.0cm and f = 9cm.<br />

Putting this into the thin lens equation we find<br />

1<br />

6cm + 1 = 1<br />

x i 9cm −→ 1 = 1<br />

x i 9cm − 1<br />

6cm = − 1<br />

18cm<br />

−→ x i = −18cm<br />

Now we can use the magnification equation to find the size of the image.<br />

y i<br />

= − y o<br />

−→ y i = − x i<br />

y o = − −18 (2cm) = 6.0cm<br />

x i x o<br />

x o 6<br />

⊲ Problem 8.4<br />

You have a lens with a focal length of 80cm. You place an object at<br />

60cm from the lens. The object is 3cm tall.<br />

(a) Construct the image location using the principle rays.<br />

(b) Find the location of the image using the thin lens equation.<br />

(c) Find the height of the image from the magnification equation.<br />

⊲ Problem 8.5<br />

For a converging lens with a focal length of f, over what range of object<br />

distances is the image:<br />

(a) real?


8.8 Diverging Lenses 171<br />

(b) virtual?<br />

(c) upright?<br />

(d) inverted?<br />

(e) larger than the object?<br />

§ 8.8 Diverging Lenses<br />

Now consider what happens when parallel rays strike a lens that<br />

is thiner in the middle. The rays diverge from the optical axis as if<br />

they came from the focal point on the incident side. This type of lens<br />

is called a Diverging Lens. This is drawn in the figure below.<br />

-f<br />

We might also consider what happens to rays that are converging toward<br />

the focal point on the far side of the lens, these rays exit the lens<br />

parallel to the optical axis, as indicated in the diagram below.<br />

-f<br />

We can, as before, construct the location and size of the image, by<br />

using three principle rays. The three rays are, (1) a ray that leaves the<br />

object parallel to the optical axis, (2) a ray going through the center of<br />

the lens, (3) a ray that leaves the object headed toward the focal point<br />

on the far side of the lens. This has been done in the figure below.


172 Geometric Optics 8.9<br />

x o<br />

-x i<br />

-f -f<br />

We can also find the location and size of the image by using the thin<br />

lens equation and the magnification equation. Once again a negative<br />

value for image distance x i , indicates that the image is on the same<br />

side of the lens as the source of the light. We must also use a negative<br />

value for the focal length of a diverging lens.<br />

Example<br />

Suppose that in the figure above x 0 = 20cm, y o = 8cm and f = −12cm.<br />

Putting this into the thin lens equation we find<br />

1<br />

20cm + 1 1<br />

=<br />

x i −12cm −→ 1 = − 1<br />

x i 12cm − 1<br />

20cm<br />

−→ x i = −7.5cm<br />

Now we can use the magnification equation to find the size of the image.<br />

y i<br />

= − y o<br />

−→ y i = − x i<br />

y o = − −7.5 (8cm) = 3.0cm<br />

x i x o<br />

x o 20<br />

⊲ Problem 8.6<br />

You have a lens with a focal length of -100cm. You place an object at<br />

150cm from the lens. The object is 5cm tall.<br />

(a) Construct the image location using the principle rays.<br />

(b) Find the location of the image using the thin lens equation.<br />

(c) Find the height of the image from the magnification equation.<br />

⊲ Problem 8.7<br />

For a diverging lens, show that the object distance must be negative, in<br />

order for the image distance to be positive. In other words the object<br />

must be virtual, in order for the image to be real. We will see, in<br />

the next section, how it is possible for to have a virtual object to be<br />

negative.


8.10 Multi-Lens Optical Systems 173<br />

Example<br />

§ 8.9 Sign Conventions and Coordinates System<br />

We have used the coordinates<br />

(x o , y o ) for the object and the coordinates<br />

(x i , y i ) for the image. The<br />

direction of positive y is the same<br />

for both coordinate systems. The<br />

direction of positive x was opposite.<br />

Light<br />

In<br />

A curved mirror is also a lens. The coordinate<br />

sign convention, stated as follows,<br />

covers both types of lenses.<br />

• The x-axis of the object coordinate system<br />

is in the opposite direction as the incoming<br />

light.<br />

• The x-axis of the image coordinate system<br />

is in the same direction as the outgoing light.<br />

y o<br />

y i<br />

Light<br />

x o<br />

x Out i<br />

Transmitting Lens<br />

Light<br />

In<br />

Light<br />

Out<br />

x o<br />

x i<br />

y o<br />

y i<br />

Reflecting Lens<br />

A concave mirror (as shown) is a converging lens, while a convex<br />

mirror is a diverging lens. The sign convention for focal lengths is the<br />

same for mirrors.<br />

§ 8.10 Multi-Lens Optical Systems<br />

Most optical systems are composed of more than one lens. We do<br />

not need more theory in order to work with a multi-lens system. The<br />

light passes from one lens to the next in sequence. In order to do a<br />

computation with a multi-lens system, we need only use the image of<br />

one lens as the object of the next lens.<br />

Suppose that you have a diverging lens, f = −12cm, followed by a<br />

converging lens, f ′ = 16cm. The lenses are 20 cm apart. You place an<br />

object that is 9cm tall at a distance of 24 cm from the diverging lens.<br />

We can construct the final image as follows.<br />

24 cm<br />

20 cm<br />

28 cm 37.3 cm<br />

Mirror<br />

Object 1<br />

8cm<br />

12cm<br />

Image 1<br />

Object 2<br />

12cm<br />

16cm<br />

Or we could compute the final image from the thin lens equation. Given<br />

f = −12cm and x o = 24cm we can compute<br />

1<br />

= 1 x i f − 1 1<br />

=<br />

x o −12cm − 1<br />

24cm = − 3<br />

24cm −→ x i = −8cm<br />

16cm<br />

Image 2


174 Geometric Optics 8.10<br />

So<br />

y i = − x i<br />

y o = − −8 (9cm) = 3cm<br />

x o 24<br />

The second lens is 20 cm past the first, so the object distance for the<br />

second lens is<br />

x ′ o = 20cm − x i = 20cm − (−8cm) = 28cm.<br />

From this we can compute the final image location<br />

1<br />

x ′ = 1<br />

i f ′ − 1 x ′ = 1<br />

o 16cm − 1<br />

28cm −→ x′ i = 37.33cm<br />

and<br />

y i ′ = − x′ i<br />

x ′ y o = − −37.3 (3cm) = 4cm<br />

o 28<br />

Notice that the second lens has formed a real image of the virtual image<br />

produced by the first lens.<br />

In the following example, the second lens has a virtual object.<br />

Example<br />

Suppose that you have a converging lens, f = 12cm, followed by a<br />

diverging lens, f ′ = −12cm. The lenses are 18 cm apart. You place an<br />

object that is 4cm tall at a distance of 24 cm from the converging lens.<br />

We can construct the final image as follows.<br />

24 cm<br />

18 cm<br />

Image 2<br />

Image 1<br />

Object 1<br />

12cm<br />

12cm<br />

12cm<br />

Object 2<br />

The top ray is not used to construct the first image, since it is not a<br />

principle ray of the first lens. The first image is constructed from the<br />

other two rays, and then the third ray is draw so that it goes to the<br />

first image and also through the center of the second lens, this makes<br />

it a principle ray of the second lens. Similarly the center ray is not a<br />

principle ray of the second lens, it is only used for constructing the first<br />

image. The bottom ray is a principle ray of both lenses.


8.11 Homework 175<br />

We can also compute the final image from the thin lens equation.<br />

Given f = 12cm and x o = 24cm we can compute<br />

1<br />

= 1 x i f − 1 = 1<br />

x o 12cm − 1<br />

24cm = 1<br />

24cm −→ x i = 24cm<br />

So<br />

y i = − x i<br />

y o = − 24 (4cm) = −4cm<br />

x o 24<br />

The second lens is 18 cm past the first, so the object distance for the<br />

second lens is<br />

x ′ o = 18cm − x i = 18cm − (24cm) = −6cm.<br />

From this we can compute the final image location<br />

1<br />

x ′ = 1<br />

i f ′ − 1 1<br />

x ′ =<br />

o −12cm − 1<br />

−6cm −→ x′ i = 12cm<br />

and<br />

y i ′ = − x′ i<br />

x ′ y o = − 12 (−4cm) = −8cm<br />

o −6<br />

Notice that the diverging lens has formed a real image. Also notice that<br />

the first lens would have formed a real image, but since the diverging<br />

lens enters the optical path before the image is formed, the first image<br />

does not actually get formed.<br />

§ 8.11 Homework<br />

⊲ Problem 8.8<br />

You are designing a movie projector. The film is 8mm wide, and you<br />

wish to project this film onto a screen that is 2.0 meters wide from a<br />

distance of 10 meters.<br />

(a) How far from the lens should the film be?<br />

(b) What should the focal length of the lens be?<br />

⊲ Problem 8.9<br />

An object is located 20cm to the left of a diverging lens having a focal<br />

length f = −32cm. Determine the location and magnification of the<br />

image. Construct a ray diagram for this arrangement.<br />

⊲ Problem 8.10<br />

An object is placed 40 cm in front of a lens with focal length +10 cm.<br />

Describe the image (i.e. location, magnification, etc.).<br />

⊲ Problem 8.11<br />

<strong>Two</strong> converging lenses, each of focal length 10 cm, are separated by<br />

35 cm. An object is 20 cm to the left of the first lens. (a) Find the


176 Geometric Optics 8.11<br />

position of the final image using both a ray diagram and the thin-lens<br />

equation. (b) Is the image real or virtual? Upright or inverted? (c)<br />

What is the overall magnification of the image?<br />

⊲ Problem 8.12<br />

An object is 15 cm in front of a positive lens of focal length 15 cm. A<br />

second negative lens of focal length -15 cm is 20 cm from the first lens.<br />

Find the final image and draw a ray diagram.<br />

⊲ Problem 8.13<br />

A concave mirror has a focal length of 40.0cm. Determine the object<br />

position for which the resulting image is upright and four times the size<br />

of the object.<br />

⊲ Problem 8.14<br />

A concave mirror has a radius of curvature of 60 cm, (f = 30cm).<br />

Calculate the image position and magnification of an object placed in<br />

front of the mirror at distances of 90 cm and 20 cm. Draw ray diagrams<br />

to obtain the image in each case.<br />

⊲ Problem 8.15<br />

Under what conditions will a concave mirror produce and erect image?<br />

A virtual image? An image smaller than the object? An image larger<br />

than the object? Repeat the exercise for a convex mirror.<br />

⊲ Problem 8.16<br />

A dentist wants a small mirror that will produce an upright image with<br />

a magnification of 5.5 when the mirror is located 2.1 cm from a tooth.<br />

(a) What should the radius of curvature of the mirror be? (b) Should<br />

it be concave or convex?


@ Summary 177<br />

§ 8.12 Summary<br />

Facts<br />

• Law of Reflection:<br />

θ i = θ r<br />

• Snell’s Law:<br />

n i sin θ i = n t sin θ t<br />

Theorems<br />

• Thin Lens Equation:<br />

1<br />

x o<br />

+ 1 x i<br />

= 1 f


178 Hints A<br />

A<br />

Hints<br />

1.1 Do the directions “by hand”. To make it easier to keep track of<br />

everything write all forces in terms of the quantity F 0 =<br />

1.2 Use the vector form of Coulomb’s law.<br />

1.3 The answer is E(x, ⃗ 0) = q<br />

4πɛ 0<br />

−2aĵ<br />

(x 2 +a 2 ) 3/2 .<br />

q2<br />

4πɛ 0a<br />

. 2<br />

1.4 Use polar coordinates, ⃗r s = R cos θî + R sin θĵ and dq = Q 2π dθ.<br />

1.5 Use Gauss’s Law.<br />

1.6 Do not attempt to integrate the flux over the surfaces. First,<br />

look carefully at the orientation of the electric field through each of the<br />

three faces that touch the charge. Second, because of the symmetry of<br />

the configuration the remaining three faces must have the same flux as<br />

each other. Third, notice that if you placed eight such cubes around<br />

the charge (forming a larger cube with the charge at the center), that<br />

all eight smaller cubes would have the same flux.<br />

1.7 Use a gaussian surface that is a sphere of radius r, centered on<br />

the charge.<br />

1.8 Use Gauss’s law. The gaussian surfaces are spheres. If r < R<br />

then the amount of charge inside the gaussian surface depends on r,<br />

show that the amount of charge inside is q in = Q r3<br />

R 3<br />

1.10 Assume that the field is directed straight out from the line. Let<br />

the Gaussian surface be a cylinder (like a tin can) with the line charge<br />

as the axis of the cylinder. Note that the flux through the ends of the<br />

can is zero because of the orientation relative to the field.<br />

1.11 The gaussian surface is a cylinder of radius r and length L.<br />

1.12 Recall that there can be no field inside the body of a conductor<br />

that is in static equilibrium.<br />

1.13 The geometry gives you the angle of the forces, but because<br />

the charges are not of the same size you must still deal with both<br />

components. Depending on your disposition, you might prefer using<br />

the vector form of Coulombs law.


A Hints 179<br />

1.14 Since this is only an estimate, assume that you are composed<br />

entirely of water.<br />

1.16 Be sure to add the parts as vectors.<br />

1.17 Let the charge elements dq be little sections of arc that subtend<br />

and angle dθ. Notice that the full charge is spread over a half a circle<br />

so that the charge density (charge per angle) is −7.5µC<br />

π<br />

, so that dq =<br />

−7.5µC<br />

π<br />

dθ.<br />

1.18 Use the work energy theorem. Recall that work is force time<br />

distance.<br />

1.19 This is like a projectile motion problem, but this time we have<br />

a constant electric force rather than an constant gravitational force.<br />

1.20 Start by making a free body diagram and be sure to include the<br />

force of gravity and the force of the string.<br />

1.21 A flux is negative if it is into the volume of the box and positive<br />

if the flux is out of the volume of the box.<br />

1.22 There is a very easy way to do this problem, by using the fact<br />

that there is no charge inside the volume of the nose cone.<br />

1.25 ⃗r = −xî<br />

2.1 Look at the definition of electric potential, how is the electric<br />

potential related to potential energy?<br />

2.2 Use the work energy theorem.<br />

2.3 Follow the example in the text for a nonuniform field.<br />

2.4 Follow the example in the text.<br />

2.6 Consider a closed surface that is totally within the outer conductor<br />

and surrounds the inside surface of the outer conductor, as indicated<br />

by the dotted line in the figure. Using the fact that there is no field<br />

inside a conductor argue that the electric flux through this surface is<br />

zero. From this use Gauss’s law to find the charge on the inside surface<br />

of the outer conductor. Next use the fact that the total charge on the<br />

outer conductor is equal to the sum of the charge on its two surfaces,<br />

to find the charge on the outside surface of the outer conductor.<br />

2.7 Use Gauss’s law. Remember that the electric field is zero inside<br />

the body of a conductor.<br />

2.8 Use the definition of capacitance.<br />

2.9 Use the fact that the electric field strength between the plates is<br />

both σ/ɛ 0 and ∆V/d, where σ is the charge density on the plates.<br />

2.10 Assume that the capacitor is charged so that the inside sphere<br />

has a charge Q and the outside sphere has a charge −Q. Use Gauss’s<br />

law to get the field strength between the shells.


180 Hints A<br />

2.11 First suppose that there is a charge Q on the length L of the<br />

central wire, and a charge −Q on the outer shield. Then use gauss’s<br />

law to show that the electric field strength between the wire and shield<br />

is E =<br />

Q 1<br />

2πLɛ 0 r<br />

. Next show that the potential difference between the<br />

wire and shield is ∆V =<br />

Q<br />

2πLɛ 0<br />

ln(b/a). Finally use the definition of<br />

capacitance.<br />

2.12 The field around a line charge has already been found, use this<br />

to find the electric potential around a single wire. Find the electric<br />

potential difference as you move from one to the other for each wire<br />

and then add. Once you have the electric potential difference between<br />

the wires you can find the capacitance.<br />

2.13 Since there is a maximum field strength there is also a maximum<br />

energy density, and the energy density is the energy stored divided by<br />

the volume of the capacitor.<br />

2.14 The change in the charge switches the direction of the electric<br />

field, which alters the dot product. Also q = −|q|.<br />

2.15 Use the work energy theorem.<br />

2.16 Use the work energy theorem.<br />

2.17 Use the work energy theorem.<br />

2.18 Use the work energy theorem.<br />

2.19 Use the work energy theorem.<br />

2.20 Assemble the particles one at a time. The work to bring the<br />

first particle in is zero since there is no field to do work against. The<br />

second particles feels the potential of the first as you bring it in. The<br />

third particle feels the potential of the first two, and so on.<br />

2.21 The field is the gradient of the potential.<br />

2.22 V = ∫ dq<br />

4πɛ . 0r<br />

2.23 Find the electric potential for each section first. You have actually<br />

done a problem like each of the sections before.<br />

2.24 Write out the field and electric potential of a point charge, then<br />

do some algebra.<br />

2.25 The potential is the sum of the three point potentials. The field<br />

can be found from the derivative of the potential.<br />

2.26 The answer will be in terms of the radius (r 0 ), field (E 0 ), charge<br />

density (σ 0 ), and potential (V 0 ) of the original drops. The charge is all<br />

on the surface of the drop.


A Hints 181<br />

2.27 Imagine that you build of the charge slowly. Suppose that you<br />

have already got a charge q accumulated and you want to bring in an<br />

amount dq more. How much work dW must you do? Once you have<br />

dW written out you can integrate to get W .<br />

2.28 Use Gauss’s law to find the field in all three regions. Then<br />

integrate from infinity inward to find the electric potential. You will<br />

need to split the integral into three regions because the form of the field<br />

changes each time you cross the surface of a shell.<br />

2.29 Look at the definition of capacitance.<br />

2.30 Look at the definition of capacitance.<br />

3.1 The amount of charge is equal to the number of particles times<br />

the charge per particle.<br />

3.2 You will need to use Ohm’s law, the definition of current density<br />

and the relationship between the electric field and the electric potential<br />

∆V = −E ∆x.<br />

3.3 Use the result that R = ρL/A.<br />

3.4 Use P = I ∆V .<br />

3.5 Look up the theorem on electrical power.<br />

3.6 Use the result of the example before this problem.<br />

3.7 The current and voltage on the resistor can be negative (and they<br />

are in this case).<br />

3.8 Assume that the centripetal acceleration of the electron is caused<br />

by the Coulomb force of the proton on the electron. Remember the<br />

definition of electric current.<br />

3.9 Remember that you know the charge of each electron, and that<br />

current is the amount of charge per time.<br />

3.10 Read the definition of current.<br />

3.11 q = ∫ dq = ∫ dq<br />

dt dt<br />

3.12 First compute how many electrons pass a particular point in the<br />

wire in one second. All of these electrons together fill a volume V of<br />

the wire. From the number of electrons you can compute the volume of<br />

electrons. Once you have the volume you can compute the length the<br />

electrons occupy in the wire, since you know the cross sectional area<br />

of the wire. But this length is the distance the electrons move in one<br />

second.<br />

3.13 Use the result that R = ρl/A.<br />

3.14 Look up electric power.


182 Hints A<br />

3.16 Compute the total charge that can flow from the battery. One<br />

kilowatt hour is a unit of energy 3600kJ.<br />

3.17 From the specific heat of water you can find the energy required<br />

and from this you can find the power and thus from the known voltage<br />

you can find the current and then resistance.<br />

3.18 The internal resistance acts like it is in series with the external<br />

resistor and and ideal voltage source.<br />

3.19 Reduce the system in stages. Look for pairs of resistors in the<br />

system that are in parallel or in series, combine this pair, then repeat<br />

until there is only one resistor left.<br />

3.23 Write out all of the equations and then solve.<br />

3.25 Connect the circuit to a voltage supply V S and using Kirchhoff’s<br />

rules for the resultant circuit you can find the charge on each capacitor.<br />

This will in turn allow you to compute the total charge drawn form the<br />

power supply and thus the effective capacitance of the system.<br />

3.26 Use Kirchhoff’s rules<br />

3.27 Use Kirchhoff’s rules<br />

3.28 The bulb that draws the most power is brighter.<br />

3.29 The appliances are connected in parallel to the voltage supply.<br />

3.30 Use the result of the other problem in which you computed the<br />

resistance of a 12 gauge copper wire.<br />

3.31 The amount of heating is proportional to the power dissipated<br />

by the wire per length.<br />

3.32 When the capacitor is fully charged, no current flows into it.<br />

4.1<br />

(a) Notice that ⃗ dl has length Rdθ and is perpendicular to the radius<br />

vector.<br />

4.2 Compute the force on each of the fours section of wire first. Recall<br />

that torque is ⃗τ = ⃗r × ⃗ F , where ⃗r points from the axis of rotation to<br />

the point at which the force is applied.<br />

4.5 For any radius it will take a time 2πm/qB<br />

4.6 Plug the given values into the Lorentz force formula and do the<br />

cross product.<br />

4.7 The magnetic field of the earth points roughly northward.<br />

4.8 Don’t forget that the electron is negatively charged.<br />

4.9 This question is asking you to relate acceleration and force so<br />

start with Newton’s second law.


A Hints 183<br />

4.12 Consider the vector nature of the definition of work and the<br />

direction of the velocity relative to the magnetic force.<br />

4.13 Write out the vectors ⃗ L for each line segment and then do the<br />

cross products.<br />

5.1 Try plotting points for various values of t to get a sense of the<br />

function.<br />

5.2 Start with ⃗r(t) = ⃗a + btî + ct 2 ĵ and find the value of the constants<br />

by demanding that the curve goes through the three given points.<br />

5.3 The parameterization is tî<br />

5.4 The parameterization is a cos tî + a sin tĵ.<br />

5.5 Since the current density is not uniform, I in = ∫ JdA.<br />

5.7 Use the result B = µ 0 I/2πr.<br />

5.8 Use the Biot-Savart law.<br />

5.9 Use the method of the previous problem, and also note that the<br />

current can be found from the electron speed and the radius of the<br />

orbit.<br />

5.10 First argue that half of the wire does not produce any field at<br />

the point of interest. Then use the Biot-Savart law on the other half.<br />

5.11 Argue that the radial lines do not contribute. Note that the<br />

field due to the two arcs are in opposite directions to each other.<br />

5.12 First find the field created by wire 1 at the location of wire 2.<br />

Then find the force that this field produces on wire 2.<br />

5.13 Use Ampere’s Law.<br />

5.14 Use Ampere’s Law.<br />

5.15 Since the current density is not uniform, I in = ∫ JdA.<br />

6.1 The induced current is in the same direction as the electric field.<br />

Determine the direction of the induced field in the center of the loop,<br />

from the known electric field direction. Compare the induced field with<br />

the existing field.<br />

6.2 Choose the Amperian loop to be a circle with radius r and going<br />

through the desired field point half way between the plates. Note that<br />

the current density between the plates is zero.<br />

6.3 Use Kirchhoff’s loop rule to write an equation in the current and<br />

the derivative of the current. Try a solution of the form I(t) = a+be −αt .<br />

6.4 The RMS voltage of the source in the a standard outlet is 120<br />

volts.<br />

6.5 Follow the example in the text for an RC circuit.


184 Hints A<br />

6.6 Use a phasor diagram to draw Kirchhoff’s loop rule, then find the<br />

frequency that minimizes the effective impedance of the RLC combination.<br />

6.8 Use Faraday’s law. Assume that the magnetic field decreases at<br />

a constant rate over the 20 ms that it goes from 1.6 T to zero, that is<br />

dB/dt = (−1.6T)/(20ms).<br />

6.10 Since the field strength decreases as you move further from the<br />

wire you will need to do an integral in order to compute the magnetic<br />

flux.<br />

6.11 Use Ampere’s Law.<br />

6.13 Consider that Q = ∫ Idt and I = V/R = E/R.<br />

7.2 Start from x = A cos φ.<br />

7.3 Take a look at the diagram of the oscillator that shows the phase<br />

angle at different points in the cycle. For the last part remember that<br />

v = dx/dt and consider the quantity v/x.<br />

7.4 Recall that the phase is φ = ωt + φ 0 so that ∆φ = ω∆t. Then<br />

consider by how much the phase must change in order for the oscillator<br />

to complete one cycle.<br />

7.8 First compute the phase difference. Remember that φ 1 = −kr 1<br />

and φ 2 = −kr 2 . Next use the addition of two waves theorem.<br />

7.9 The collection of points with the same ∆r will form a continuous<br />

line, just like the collection of points that are all 5cm from a single<br />

point makes a circle or radius 5 cm.<br />

7.10 Treat the two holes as two sources.<br />

7.11 The phase of each path is now −kr plus the reflection phase<br />

shift.<br />

7.12 Find the distance from the lower speaker to the point P as a<br />

function of the distance d.<br />

7.15 The path difference occurs in air.<br />

7.16 Use the far field approximation to find the path difference.<br />

7.18 Use the trig identities in the appendix.<br />

7.19 There is a path difference, d sin θ, on both sides of the screen.<br />

7.22 The air gap between the plates will be wedge shaped, because<br />

the thickness of the air gap increases as you move toward the wire,<br />

there will be an increasing phase difference between the two reflected<br />

beams. This leads to the fringes.<br />

7.24 As the slit gets narrower the angle of the first minima increases.<br />

There is a limit to the increase.


A Hints 185<br />

7.26 The distance from the central maximum to the first order maximum<br />

is the same as it would be for a double slit with the same distance<br />

between the two slits as there is between successive lines in the diffraction<br />

grating.<br />

8.1 Use geometry to show that<br />

α<br />

α/2<br />

β<br />

α/2<br />

Then use Snells law.<br />

8.2 Each straight line segment that crosses the optical axis, creates<br />

two similar triangles, one above the axis and one below the axis. Use<br />

the properties of similar triangles to get an equation for each of these<br />

pairs.<br />

8.5 Use the thin lens equation to find under what conditions the image<br />

distance is negative.<br />

8.7 Use the thin lens equation.<br />

8.8 Start with the magnification equation.


186 Index B<br />

B<br />

Index<br />

† Energy Density of an Electric Field, 48<br />

† Addition of <strong>Two</strong> Waves, 147<br />

† Ampere’s Law - Time Varying, 120<br />

† Ampere’s Law, 102<br />

† Biot-Savart Law, 97<br />

† Circular Trajectories, 84<br />

† Conductor in Equilibrium: Charge, 43<br />

† Conductor in Equilibrium: Field, 43<br />

† Conductor in Equilibrium: Potential, 44<br />

† Conductor in Equilibrium: Surface Field, 44<br />

† Coulomb’s Law in Vector Form, 8<br />

† Coulomb’s Law, 8<br />

† Effective Capacitance, 65<br />

† Effective Resistance, 64<br />

† Electric Charge, 4<br />

† Electric Field due to a Point Charge, 15<br />

† Electric Field from the Electric Potential, 40<br />

† Electric Potential of a Point Charge, 48<br />

† Electrical Power, 61<br />

† Electromagnetic Waves and Light, 139<br />

† Energy Stored in a Capacitor, 47<br />

† Faraday’s Law (alternate form), 117<br />

† Faraday’s Law, 116<br />

† Force Currents, 105<br />

† Force on a Current in a Uniform Field, 82<br />

† Gauss’s Law, 20<br />

† Impedance: Capacitor, 125<br />

† Impedance: Inductor, 124<br />

† Interference of <strong>Two</strong> Sources, 150<br />

† Kirchhoff’s Junction Rule, 61<br />

† Kirchhoff’s Loop Rule, 62<br />

† Law of reflection, 162<br />

† Lenz’s Law, 119<br />

† Magnetic Force on a Current, 82<br />

† Magnetic Force, 81<br />

† Magnification Equations, 169


B Index 187<br />

† Ohm’s Law: Resistance, 60<br />

† Ohm’s Law: Resistivity, 59<br />

† Reflection Phase Shift, 154<br />

† Short Wavelength Limit, 161<br />

† Single Slit Diffraction, 155<br />

† Snell’s Law, 163<br />

† Superposition Theorem, 15<br />

† Thin Lens Equations, 168<br />

† <strong>Two</strong> Types of Charge, 4<br />

† Wave due to a Sinusoidal Point Source, 142<br />

† Wavelength in a Medium, 154<br />

† Work by Magnetic Force, 84<br />

alternating current, 122<br />

capacitance, 46<br />

conductivity, 59<br />

conductor, 7<br />

converging lens, 166<br />

current density, 58<br />

current, 58<br />

cyclotron, 85<br />

direct current, 122<br />

displacement current, 120<br />

Diverging Lens, 171<br />

electric field, 10<br />

electric field, 11<br />

electric flux, 20<br />

electric potential, 37<br />

electromagnet, 97<br />

electromagnetic, 139<br />

electromotive force, 116<br />

elements, 57<br />

EMF, 116<br />

equipotential, 41<br />

Farad, 46<br />

field lines, 14<br />

focal length, 166<br />

focal plane, 167<br />

focal point, 166<br />

focus, 166<br />

frequency, 143<br />

gain, 128<br />

gradient, 40


188 Index B<br />

ground, 38<br />

Hall Effect, 87<br />

Henry, 120<br />

in parallel, 62<br />

in series, 62<br />

in-phase, 147<br />

index of refraction, 153<br />

inductance, 120<br />

infrared, 145<br />

Lorentz Force, 85<br />

magnetic flux, 117<br />

n-type, 88<br />

non-ohmic, 59<br />

ohm, 60<br />

ohmic, 59<br />

optical axis, 166<br />

out-of-phase, 148<br />

p-type, 88<br />

parameterization, 39<br />

parameterize, 98<br />

period, 143<br />

phase, 139<br />

phasor, 125<br />

principle focus, 166<br />

principle rays, 168<br />

real image, 168<br />

resistance, 60<br />

resistivity, 59<br />

Resistor, 59<br />

resonance, 129<br />

scalar field, 16<br />

steady state, 115<br />

Tesla, 82<br />

ultraviolet, 145<br />

uniform, 16<br />

vector field, 16<br />

velocity selector, 86<br />

wavelength, 142<br />

wiring diagram, 57


B Index 189


190 Useful Mathematics C<br />

C<br />

§ C.1 Trigonometry<br />

Useful Mathematics<br />

cos(a + b) = cos a cos b − sin a sin b<br />

sin(a + b) = sin a cos b + cos a sin b<br />

cos a + cos b = 2 cos b − a<br />

2<br />

cos a − cos b = 2 sin b − a<br />

2<br />

sin a + sin b = 2 cos b − a<br />

2<br />

cos b + a<br />

2<br />

sin b + a<br />

2<br />

sin b + a<br />

2<br />

§ C.2 Fundamental Derivatives and Integrals<br />

Basic Facts<br />

d<br />

dx [xp ] = px p−1<br />

d<br />

dx [eax ] = ae ax<br />

d<br />

dx [ln(x)] = 1 x<br />

∫<br />

d<br />

[sin(kx)] = k cos(kx)<br />

dx<br />

d<br />

dx<br />

[cos(kx)] = −k sin(kx)<br />

∫<br />

∫<br />

x p dx = xp+1<br />

∫<br />

p+1<br />

e ax dx = eax<br />

∫ 1<br />

x<br />

dx = ln(x)<br />

cos(kx) dx =<br />

sin(kx)<br />

k<br />

sin(kx) dx = −<br />

cos(kx)<br />

k<br />

a<br />

Divide and Conquer Rules<br />

Sum Rule:<br />

f(x) = a g(x) + b h(x) −→<br />

d<br />

Example:<br />

dx [3x2 + 4x 3 ] = 3 d<br />

dx [x2 ] + 4 d<br />

Product Rule:<br />

Example:<br />

2x sin(x).<br />

Chain Rule:<br />

Example:<br />

f(x) = g(x) h(x) −→<br />

df<br />

dx = a dg<br />

dx + bdh dx<br />

dx [x3 ] = 6x + 12x 2 .<br />

df<br />

dx = g(x)dh dx + dg<br />

dx h(x)<br />

d<br />

dx [x2 sin(x)] = x 2 d<br />

dx [sin(x)] + d<br />

dx [x2 ] sin(x) = x 2 cos(x) +<br />

d<br />

dx [sin(3x2 )] =<br />

df<br />

dx = dg dh<br />

dh dx<br />

d<br />

d[3x 2 ] [sin(3x2 )] d<br />

dx [3x2 ] = cos(3x 2 )6x<br />

f(x) = g(h(x)) −→


C Power Series Expansions 191<br />

The Fundamental Theorem of Calculus<br />

Recall that the distance traveled between time t 1 and time t 2 is<br />

equal to the area under the v versus t graph between these times.<br />

v(t)<br />

Area = ∫ t 2<br />

t 1<br />

v(t)dt<br />

t<br />

t 1 t 2<br />

But the distance traveled is also x(t 2 ) − x(t 1 ). So we find that<br />

∫ t2<br />

v(t)dt = x(t 2 ) − x(t 1 )<br />

t 1<br />

This works for any pair of functions where one is the derivative of the<br />

other. So in general<br />

IF<br />

f(t) = dg<br />

dt<br />

THEN<br />

∫ t2<br />

t 1<br />

f(t)dt = g(t 2 ) − g(t 1 )<br />

§ C.3 Power Series Expansions<br />

(1 + x) N =<br />

∞<br />

1<br />

1 − x = ∑<br />

x n = 1 + x + x 2 + x 3 + x 4 . . .<br />

sin(x) =<br />

n=0<br />

∞∑<br />

n=0<br />

cos(x) =<br />

e x =<br />

N∑<br />

n=0<br />

∞∑<br />

n=0<br />

(−1) n<br />

(2n + 1)! x2n+1 = x − 1 6 x3 + . . .<br />

∞∑<br />

n=0<br />

(−1) n<br />

(2n)! x2n = 1 − 1 2 x2 + . . .<br />

1<br />

n! xn = 1 + x + 1 2 x2 + 1 6 x3 + . . .<br />

N!<br />

N!<br />

n!(N − n)! xn = 1 + Nx +<br />

2!(N − 2)! x2 + · · ·


192 Physical Constants and Data D<br />

D<br />

Physical Constants and Data<br />

§ D.1 Index of Refraction<br />

(at λ=589.3 nm, from wikipedia.org)<br />

Material Index<br />

Vacuum<br />

1 (exactly)<br />

Helium 1.000036<br />

Air at STP 1.0002926<br />

carbon dioxide 1.00045<br />

water ice 1.31<br />

liquid water (20C) 1.333<br />

ethanol 1.36<br />

glycerine 1.47<br />

polycarbonate 1.59<br />

glass (typical) 1.5 to 1.9<br />

cubic zirconia 2.2<br />

diamond 2.4<br />

moissanite 2.7<br />

gallium phosphide 3.5<br />

gallium arsenide 3.9<br />

silicon 4.0<br />

§ D.2 Approximate Electrical Conductivity<br />

(from wikipedia.org)<br />

Material Ω −1 · m −1<br />

Silver 63.0 × 10 6<br />

Copper 59.6 × 10 6<br />

Gold 45.0 × 10 6<br />

Aluminium 37.8 × 10 6<br />

Brass 20.0 × 10 6<br />

Iron 10.0 × 10 6<br />

Bronze 7.0 × 10 6<br />

Lead 4.8 × 10 6<br />

Stainless Steel 1.4 × 10 6<br />

Seawater 5.0 × 10 0<br />

Drinking water 5.0 × 10 −3<br />

Deionized water 5.5 × 10 −6<br />

Glass<br />

∼ 10 −12<br />

Rubber<br />

∼ 10 −13


D Unit Prefixes 193<br />

§ D.3 Fundamental Constants<br />

speed of light c 2.99792458 × 10 8 m s<br />

(exact)<br />

Planck constant h 6.6260755(40) × 10 −34 J · s<br />

hc 1239.8424(93) eV · nm<br />

1240 eV · nm<br />

¯h 1.05457266(63) × 10 −34 J · s<br />

¯hc 197.327053(59) eV · nm<br />

fundamental charge e 1.60217733(49) × 10 −19 C<br />

mass of electron m e 9.1093897(54) × 10 −31 kg<br />

0.51099906(15) MeV/c 2<br />

mass of proton m p 1.672631(10) × 10 −27 kg<br />

938.27231(28) MeV/c 2<br />

Boltzman constant k 1.380658(12) × 10 −23 J/K<br />

8.617385(73) × 10 −5 eV/K<br />

Avogadro number N A 6.0221367(36) × 10 23<br />

permeability of free space µ 0 4π × 10 −7 N/A 2 (exact)<br />

permittivity of free space ɛ 0 1/(µ 0 c 2 ) (exact)<br />

8.854187817 × 10 −12 C 2 /N · m 2<br />

1<br />

4πɛ 0<br />

8.99 × 10 9 N · m 2 /C 2<br />

gravitational constant G 6.67259(85) × 10 −11 m 2 /kg · s<br />

§ D.4 Unit Conversions<br />

1 m 3.28 ft<br />

1.6 km 1 mile<br />

1 mile 5280 ft<br />

1 hp 746 W<br />

1 liter 1 × 10 −3 m 3<br />

1 gallon 3.79 liters<br />

1 atm 1.013 × 10 5 Pa<br />

1 J 0.239 cal<br />

1 kcal 4186 J<br />

§ D.5 Unit Prefixes<br />

f femto 10 −15<br />

p pico 10 −12<br />

n nano 10 −9<br />

µ micro 10 −6<br />

m milli 10 −3<br />

k kilo 10 3<br />

M mega 10 6<br />

G giga 10 9<br />

T tera 10 12

Hooray! Your file is uploaded and ready to be published.

Saved successfully!

Ooh no, something went wrong!